PROJECT MANUAL
FOR: Hangar 40 Rehabilitation Phase-1 Shreveport, Louisiana 71109
OWNER: SHREVEPORT AIRPORT AUTHORITY 5106 HOLLYWOOD AVENUE SHREVEPORT, LA 71109
PREPARED BY: iARCHiTECTURE, llc 417 Lake Street Shreveport, Louisiana 71101
318-828-1637 [email protected]
iA Project No. 1625 DATE OF ISSUE: July 15, 2016 SECTION 00001 – TITLE PAGE
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR: Hangar 40 Rehabilitation Phase-1 Shreveport, Louisiana 71109
PREPARED BY:
IARCHITECTURE, LLC 417 Lake Street SHREVEPORT, LA. 71101 (318) 828-1637 [email protected]
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT
“THESE DOCUMENTS ARE PROTECTED BY UNITED STATES COPYRIGHT LAW. THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED SPECIFICALLY FOR THE PROJECT IDENTIFIED AND ARE NOT SUITABLE FOR USE ON ANY OTHER PROJECT OR AT ANY OTHER LOCATION WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN APPROVAL AND PARTICIPATION OF IARCHITECTURE, LLC. REPRODUCTION OF THESE DOCUMENTS MUST BE AUTHORIZED BY THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE RESERVED TO IARCHITECTURE, LLC.”
iA PROJECT NO. 1625
DATE OF ISSUE: July 15, 2016 SECTION 00002 – PROJECT DIRECTORY
OWNER:
ARCHITECTS & iARCHiTECTURE, llc ENGINEER: Jeff Spikes 417 Lake Street Shreveport, Louisiana 71101 318-828-1637 [email protected]
CIVIL ENGINEER:
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:
MECHANICAL/ Purtle & Associates, L.C. ELECTRICAL/ 9441 Stevens Road, Suite 200 PLUMBING Shreveport, LA 71106 318.425.4500 ph 318.222.6564 fax
END OF PROJECT DIRECTORY
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PROJECT DIRECTORY iA PROJECT NO. 1625 00002-1
Section 00003 – Table of Contents
DIVISION 0 – BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
00000 FRONT COVER 00001 PROJECT MANUAL FLY SHEET 00002 PROJECT DIRECTORY 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00004 INDEX OF DRAWINGS 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01200 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 01220 INCLEMENT WEATHER DAYS 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01700 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07540 PVC ROOFING 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL (ALL SECTIONS PREPARED BY)
23 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 05 03 HVAC PIPING 23 05 48 VIBRATION ISOLATION & SOUND CONTROL 23 05 90 CLEANING & TESTING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION 23 09 00 HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 34 00 HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 01 INDUSTRIAL FANS 23 34 02 LUMINOUS INFRARED RADIANT GAS HEATERS 23 65 00 AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 00003 -1
23 73 00 INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL (ALL SECTIONS PREPARED BY)
26 04 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 03 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES 26 05 26 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 20 00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
END TABLE OF CONTENTS
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 00003 -2
Section 00004 - INDEX OF DRAWINGS
A0.00 COVER SHEET A1.01 SITE/ROOF PLAN AD2.01 EXISTING/NEW ROOF PLAN AD2.02 EXISTING HANGER PLAN A2.01 NEW ROOF PLAN/DETAILS A2.02 HANGER PLAN
MD101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN – MECHANICAL DEMOLITION MD102 SECOND FLOOR PLAN – MECHANICAL DEMOLITION M101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN – MECHANICAL M102 SECOND FLOOR PLAN – MECHANICAL M201 MECHANICAL SCHEDULE M202 MECHANICAL DETAILS
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INDEX OF DRAWINGS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 00004-1 01100 – Summary of Work
1.4 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.
1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public.
2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, garages, loading areas and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner’s Employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on‐site.
B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather‐tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.
1. Provide temporary cover material as required to protect Owner’s building content during construction period.
1.5 OWNER’S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner’s day‐to‐ day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Don not close or obstruct walkways, corridors or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. On‐Site Work Hours: Coordinate construction work hours with facility Owner/Architect/Consultant.
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Don not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect/Consultant and/or Owner not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed interruption.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions with Architect/Consultant and/or Owner’s written permission.
C. Non‐smoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within this facility without Architect/Consultant’s and/or Owner’s written permission.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protect building(s) included in Work of this contract, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings and landscaping from damage or soiling from construction operations.
B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas included in this contract.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
D. Coordinate with Owner for delivery and unloading.
iARCHiTECTURE, LLC 417 Lake Street Shreveport, Louisiana 71101 318-828-1637 [email protected]
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
Project Name:
Project No.:
Request From: Name Company Address
Phone Fax Email RFI #
Please Clarify the Following: Drawing #:
Specification Section:
Request Response By:
QUESTIONS (Number each one):
ANSWER (List answers with same number as question):
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION iA PROJECT NO. 1625 1200-1
SECTION 01220 – INCLEMENT WEATHER DAYS
If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for additional time, the Contractor shall doc- ument that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. An increase in the contract time due to weather shall not be cause for an increase in the contract sum. Notice of a claim for additional time, based on adverse weather conditions, shall be given to Owner no later than fifteen (15) days after the weather event(s) giving rise to such claim. Owner may disallow any such claim for additional time, if such notice is not given timely.
The following are considered reasonably anticipated days of adverse weather on a monthly basis:
January 11 days February 10 days March 8 days April 7 days May 5 days June 6 days July 6 days August 5 days September 4 days October 3 days November 5 days December 8 days
The Contractor shall ask for total adverse weather days, the Contractor's request shall be consid- ered only for days over the allowable number of days stated above. Note: Contract is on a calendar day basis.
END OF SECTION 01220
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INCLEMENT WEATHER DAYS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01220-1 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Appli- cations for Payment.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days be- fore the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Schedule of Values form contained in the project manual.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Ar- chitect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: Application for Payment shall be submitted on or about the first of each month for the value of labor and materials incorporated in the Work and of materials stored at the work site as of the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period. Submit prior to monthly progress meetings.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Payment Application:
a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01290-1
d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. f. Submittal number
2. Base the breakdown of the Contract Sum on the approved Schedule of Values and provide further breakdowns of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. 3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 4. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored at the site, but not yet installed.
a. No payments will be considered for items stored off-site, for shop drawing preparation costs or other supplier costs requested before products or services are delivered to or preformed at the site.
5. Provide separate line items in the Application for payment for initial cost of materials upon delivery, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 6. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use up- dated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 11. Performance and payment bonds. 12. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 13. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. 14. Installation of specified construction signage.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01290-2
G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as sub- stantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Sub- stantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01290-3
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
0.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Preparing and processing of submittals for review and action. 2. Preparing and processing of informational submittals.
B. Submit the following for the architect's review and action: 1. Shop drawings. 2. Structural design information required by the contract documents. 3. Product data. 4. Samples. 5. Submittals for which procedures are not defined elsewhere.
C. Submit the following as informational submittals: 1. Certificates. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Reports. 4. Qualification statements for manufacturers/installers.
D. Specific submittals required are described in individual sections.
0.02 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Sheets sizes 1. 8-1/2 by 11 Inches: 2. 11 by 17 inches. 3. 22 by 34 inches. 4. Full size templates may be submitted on larger sheet. 5. Number of copies: a. Submittals for review: 1. One correctable reproducible print not folded and 2 copies of blue or black line prints. 2. Reproducible will be returned. b. Informational submittals: 1. 4 of opaque prints. 2. 2 copies will be returned.
B. Samples: 2 sets of each. 1. 1 set will be returned.
C. If additional sets are needed by other entities involved in work represented by the samples, submit with original submittal.
D. Copies in excess of the number requested will not be returned.
E. Provide additional copies for project record documents.
F. Use of contract documents for shop drawings is not permitted.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01330-1
G. The architect will not supply digital data to the contractor for the purpose of preparation of shop drawings and submittals.
1.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. b. Coordinated submittals include but are not limited to: c. Division 9 - Finish Materials
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Progress Documentation and Procedures" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Allow 15 days for processing each re-submittal. 4. If a submittal must be processed within a certain time in order to maintain the progress of the work, state so clearly on the submittal. 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01330-2 E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents.
G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Provide one copy for the owner's record to be compiled, maintained and submitted to the owner at substantial completion. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
H. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy. The contractor will reproduce copies of the returned original for distribution.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01330-3 e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 4. Copies of standard printed documents are not acceptable as shop drawings. 5. Space for architect's action marking shall be adjacent to the title block.
D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 2. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. 4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 5. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit three full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return 2 submittals with options selected. 6. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 7. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01330-4 G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Control Procedures."
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Progress Documentation and Procedures."
C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.
I. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"
J. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01330-5 K. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
L. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
M. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. 1. General: Architect will not review submittals that are illegible and will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01330-6 C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
END OF SECTION 01330
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01330-7 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. General quality control activities. 2. Procedures for the following: a. Testing and evaluation of test results. b. Inspections. c. Construction and evaluation of mock-ups. d. Manufacturers' field services. 3. Procedures for quality control activities performed by: a. Public authorities having jurisdiction. b. Independent testing agencies. c. Contractor. d. Manufacturers' representatives. 4. Procedures for submittal of quality control documentation.
B. Quality control activities required are specified in other sections.
C. See General Conditions for additional requirements for testing, inspections, and approvals.
D. The cost of quality control activities specified to be paid for by the owner is not to be included in the contract sum.
1.02 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Independent testing agencies, whether employed by the owner or the contractor, may not change the requirements of the contract documents and may not approve any portion of the work.
B. Employment of testing agencies, by the contractor or the owner, shall not relieve the contractor of his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the contract documents.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Reference Standards - General: 1. Comply with edition of standard in effect as of: a. Date of agreement. 2. Compliance with standards which are revised or reissued after that date will not be required unless incorporated into the contract documents by modification. 3. Where applicable codes, laws, or regulations require editions of different dates, obtain instructions from the governing authorities as to which edition is required.
B. The requirements of reference standards are binding on the contractor, just as if they were copied into the contract documents, but no provisions of reference standards shall alter the contractual relationship of the parties to the contract.
C. Keep at the site each standard which is indicated elsewhere as to be kept at the site.
1.04 SUBMITTALS HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01400-1
A. Reports: Provide certified copies of reports. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, submit for information only. 2. Submit reports not later than the date of application for payment for the work to which the quality control activity relates. 3. Reports shall be prepared by the entity performing the quality control activity. 4. Submit copies directly to governing authorities when so directed. 5. When the contractor employs an independent testing agency, submit copies directly to the architect. 6. Include the following information in all types of reports: a. Date of report. b. Project name (and number, if applicable). c. Description of the quality control activity. d. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing activity. e. Date quality control activity was performed. f. Specification section(s) involved. g. Basis for evaluation (test method, etc.). h. Results or conclusions, including evaluations and interpretations. i. Title, name, and signature of person performing activity. 7. Include the following information in all test reports: a. Locations from which samples were taken, if any. b. Ambient conditions at time of activity. c. Recommendations for retesting, if any.
B. Certificates: Submit for information only, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Certificates shall be signed by the product manufacturer, unless otherwise specified or not applicable. 2. Include the following information: a. Date of certificate. b. Project name (and number, if applicable). c. Description of the product or system certified. d. Specification section(s) involved. e. When actual materials to be used are to be certified, include lot identification markings, destination or shipment, and quantity in shipment. f. Title, name, and signature of person authorized to make certification.
C. Qualification Statements: Submit for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit for information only, unless otherwise indicated; identify conflicts with contract documents.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Manufacturers: As indicated in individual sections.
B. Qualifications of Installers: As indicated in individual sections.
C. Qualifications of Manufacturers' Field Personnel: Employed directly by the manufacturer and normally performing the activities specified.
D. Qualifications of Testing and Inspection Personnel: 1. As indicated in individual sections. 2. Independent Testing Agency Qualifications: When employed by the contractor: HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01400-2 a. A firm independent from the contractor's organization. b. Having experience in the testing specified, and having the capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing specified without delaying the progress of the work, as shown by information supplied as required by ASTM E 699. c. Approved by the architect. d. Authorized to conduct business in the state in which the project is located. 3. Do not employ the same testing agency the owner has employed for testing or inspecting the same portion of the work (if any), unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
E. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) standards or to accepted values of natural physical constants.
1.06 COORDINATION WITH OTHER ENTITIES
A. Cooperate with other entities performing quality control activities.
B. Provide samples of materials and design criteria as indicated and when requested.
C. Provide other assistance, equipment, tools, and storage facilities as specified.
D. If desired, make arrangements with those entities and pay for additional similar or related testing or inspection required for the contractor's use or convenience.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate quality control activities to avoid delay and to make it unnecessary to uncover work for testing or inspection.
B. Notify the owner's testing agencies 48 hours prior to commencement or completion of work which is to be tested or inspected, whichever is applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide work of the specified quality; where quality level is not indicated, provide work of quality customary in similar types of work. 1. Where codes, laws, or regulations require work of higher quality or performance, provide work complying with those codes, laws, and regulations. 2. Where two or more quality provisions of the contract documents conflict, comply with the most stringent requirement; where requirements are different but apparently equal, and where it is uncertain which requirement is most stringent, obtain clarification from the architect before proceeding. 3. Actual quality may exceed the specified quality; verify that such differences are acceptable to the owner (other criteria may make excessive quality undesirable).
B. Control products, suppliers, manufacturers, site conditions, installers, and workmanship in such a manner as to produce work of the specified quality.
C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01400-3 1. Keep a record of instructions and recommendations which supplement or conflict with the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When manufacturers' instructions and recommendations conflict with the contract documents, obtain clarification from the architect before proceeding.
D. Use installers who are capable of producing work of the specified quality.
E. Perform all quality control activities specified unless indicated to be performed by other entities.
3.02 MOCK-UPS
A. Mock-ups required are specified in other sections.
B. Construct mock-ups as specified for actual work, with all components required for a complete installation.
C. Erect specified mock-ups in locations indicated. 1. Where mock-ups are to be removed, clear area after removal of mock-up and return to original or specified condition.
D. Where mock-ups are to be approved by the architect, obtain approval of the architect prior to proceeding with installation.
E. Where mock-ups are to be tested for compliance, obtain satisfactory test results prior to proceeding with the work.
3.03 TESTING
A. Perform tests specified.
B. When results of tests are unsatisfactory, make whatever changes or repairs are necessary and retest.
C. Submit written report of each original test and of each retest.
3.04 INSPECTING
A. Perform inspections specified.
B. When inspections reveal unsatisfactory work, make whatever changes or repairs are necessary and reinspect.
C. Submit written report of each original inspection and each reinspection.
3.05 PROTECTION AND REPAIR
A. When work is uncovered during quality control activities, provide protection from damage.
B. Correct work damaged by quality control activities; where repair is indicated as an unacceptable method, replace the work.
END OF SECTION 01400 HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01400-4 SECTION 01500 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DCOUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section “Summary of Work” for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Architect/Consultant, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water Service: Water from Owner’s existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of servicers as required for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service: Contractor provides his own portable power at ratings set by the manufacturer for the Equipment being used.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY FACILTIES
A. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operations and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
1. Furnish one fire extinguisher for each gas powered piece of equipment.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01500 - 1
B. Gasoline Container: One OSHA approved five (5) gallon gas container may be accepted on the roof, with a fire extinguisher, when OSHA rules allow.
C. Unless Owner authorizes use of gasoline-burning heaters, open-flame heaters or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
B. Provide each facility read for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. Water Service: Use of Owner’s existing water service facilities will be permitted as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.
B. Electric Power Service: Contractor provides his own portable power at ratings set by the manufacturer for the Equipment being used.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner’s existing parking areas for construction personnel.
C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Contractor is to provide waste-collection in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01500 - 2
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered “tools and equipment” and not temporary facilities
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
B. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended use.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
END OF SECTION
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01500 - 3 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures for substitutions during bidding period. 2. General product requirements, including: a. General specification requirements for all products. b. Product options. c. Procedures for substitution requests. 3. General requirements for product documentation, including: a. Requirements and procedures for schedule of products. b. General requirements for operation and maintenance data. 4. General procedures for products including: a. Procedures for transportation and handling. b. Procedures for delivery and receiving.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Products: Submit for approval.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for information only.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a specification section shall be identical, interchangeable, and made by the same manufacturer.
2.02 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS AND TOOLS
A. Maintenance Materials: Parts and materials for repair and maintenance; specific items required are specified in product sections.
1. Provide products and tools which are identical to those used in the work; of necessary to obtain identical items, order at the same time as products to be installed or tools to be used in the work.
B. Package appropriately and label to show type and quantity of contents.
C. Deliver, handle, and store in the same manner as products to be installed.
D. Do not turn over to the owner until date of substantial completion, unless otherwise approved by the owner.
E. Deliver to the owner; unload.
F. Obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS iA PROJECT NO. 1624 01600-1
3.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. It is the contractor's responsibility to select products which comply with the contract documents and which are compatible with one another, with existing work, and with products selected by other contractors. 1. Verify that electrical characteristics of products are compatible with electrical systems; notify architect of all discrepancies. 2. Where visual matching to an established physical sample is required, the architect's decision will be final.
B. Do not use any substitute products which have not been approved in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents; formal substitution request is required.
C. Definition of Substitute Product: Any product which does not meet the requirements of the contract documents, whether in product characteristics, performance, quality, or manufacturer or brand names, is considered a substitute.
D. Product Options: Where products are specified using more than one method, such as description with a manufacturer list, use a product meeting the requirements of both specification methods.
E. Products Specified by Description: Use any product meeting the specification.
F. Products Specified by Performance Requirements: Use any product meeting the specification.
G. Products Specified to Match a Physical Sample: Use any product that matches; obtain the architect's approval.
H. Products Specified by Listing a Brand Name Product as the "Basis of Design": Provide a product equivalent to the product specified within the limits of variation specified; submit substitution request for all products other than that listed as basis of design.
I. Products Specified by Reference Standard: Use any product meeting the specification. Provisions of reference standards shall not modify the responsibilities of the owner or architect as defined in the contract documents.
J. Products Specified by Listing Brand Name(s): Provide a product at least equal to the brand name product, or products, listed; submit substitution request for any brand name product not listed.
K. Products Specified by Listing Manufacturer(s): Provide a product meeting the specification; submit substitution request for any manufacturer not listed.
3.02 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD
A. Substitution requests submitted later than 7 days prior to the bid date will not be considered.
B. Acceptable substitutions will be added to the contract documents by addendum; no verbal approvals will be valid.
3.03 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD OF THE CONTRACT
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS iA PROJECT NO. 1624 01600-2 A. Substitutions will not be considered between the bid date and the award of the contract.
B. Substitutions will not be allowed after award of the contract except when, through no fault of the contractor, none of the specified products is available.
3.04 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE
A. Submission of request for substitution shall constitute a representation by the contractor that he: 1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or better than the specified product. Absence of an explicit comparison of any characteristic of the proposed product to the specified product shall constitute a representation that the proposed product is equal to or better than the specified product with regard to that characteristic. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the proposed product as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate the installation and make other changes which may be required for the work to be complete in all respects, including: c. Redesign. d. Additional components and capacity required by other work affected by the change. 4. Waives all claims for additional costs and time extensions which subsequently may become apparent and which are caused by the change. 5. Will reimburse the owner for additional costs for evaluation of the substitution request, redesign if required, and reapproval by authorities having jurisdiction if required.
B. Substitutions will not be considered when acceptance would require substantial revision of the contract documents.
C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals without separate written request.
D. Substitution requests will not be considered when submitted directly by subcontractor or supplier.
E. Substitution Request Procedure: Submit written request with complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed product with the requirements of the contract documents. 1. Submit request to the architect. 2. Submit 4 copies of each request and accompanying data. 3. Submit all requests on a standard form.
F. Data Required with Substitution Request: Provide at least the following data: 1. Identify product by specification section and paragraph number. 2. Manufacturer's name and address, trade name and model number of product (if applicable), and name of fabricator or supplier (if applicable). 3. Complete product data. 4. Description of changes that will be required in other work or products if the substitute product is approved. 5. Net amount of change to the connect sum. 6. Statement to the effect of the substitution on the project schedule. 7. Description of changes that will be required in other work products if the substitute product is approved.
G. The architect will determine acceptability of the proposed substitution.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS iA PROJECT NO. 1624 01600-3
H. When the proposed substitution is not accepted, provide the product (or one of the products, as the case may be) specified.
3.05 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS
A. Prepare a complete schedule of products used, including the following for each product: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Brand or trade name. 3. Model number, if applicable. 4. Reference standard, if more than one is applicable. 5. Arrange products in the schedule by specification sections; indicate paragraph where specified.
B. Prepare and submit final schedule within 30 days after award of contract.
C. Schedule of products shall not be used to obtain approval of substitute products; make separate request for substitution.
3.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Data Required For Products - General: 1. Name of manufacturer and product. 2. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor or supplier. 3. Local source of replacements. 4. Local source of replaceable parts and supplies.
B. Product Data: Where product data is specified for inclusion in operation and maintenance data, provide manufacturer's data sheets marked to indicate specific product and product options actually installed; delete inapplicable data.
C. Project Record Documents: Provide an additional copy of applicable record documents for inclusion with the operation and maintenance data.
D. Coordination Drawings: When coordination drawings are prepared, include a copy with the operating and maintenance data.
E. Form of Data: Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. 1. Arrange content logically, using section numbers and sequence of sections indicated on the table of contents of this project manual. 2. When multiple volumes are used, arrange by related subjects; identify contents in cover title. 3. Assemble into 3-ring binders with maximum 2-inch ring size. a. Hardback, cleanable plastic covers. b. Identify each book with title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions" and project name. c. Page size 8-1/2 by 11 inches, maximum. d. Prepare special typewritten data on minimum 20-pound paper. e. Provide tabbed divider for each product and system. f. Drawings: Bind in with other data; provide reinforced binding edge; fold larger drawings to size of pages. 1. Do not use pockets or loose drawings. 4. Provide table of contents for each volume listing:
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS iA PROJECT NO. 1624 01600-4 a. Name of the project. b. Name, address, telephone number, and contact name of: 1. Architect. 2. Contractor. c. Index of products and systems included in volume. d. Equipment: Provide at least the following information: 1. Product data giving equipment and function description, with normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. 2. Starting, operating, and troubleshooting procedures. 3. Cleaning and maintenance requirements and procedures. 4. External finish maintenance required. 5. List of maintenance materials required. 6. List of special tools required. 7. Parts list: List of all replaceable parts, with ordering data. 8. Recommended quantity of spare parts to be maintained in storage.
F. Systems: Provide overall function description, with diagrams prepared especially for this project.
3.07 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Require supplier to package finished products in a manner which will protect from damage during shipping, handling, and storage.
B. Transport products by methods which avoid damage.
C. Deliver in dry, undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened packaging.
D. Provide equipment and personnel adequate to handle products by methods which prevent damage.
E. Provide additional protection during handling where necessary to prevent damage to products and packaging.
F. Lift large and heavy components at designated lift points only.
3.08 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING
A. No storage area is available on site; arrange deliveries so that storage is not required.
B. Arrange deliveries of products to allow time for inspection prior to installation.
C. Coordinate delivery to avoid conflict with the work and to take into account both the conditions at the site and the availability of personnel, handling equipment, and storage space.
D. Clearly mark partial deliveries to identify contents, to permit easy accumulation of entire delivery, and to facilitate assembly.
E. Promptly inspect shipments and remedy damage, incorrect quantity, incompleteness, improper or illegible labeling, and noncompliance with requirements of contract documents and
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS iA PROJECT NO. 1624 01600-5 approved submittals.
F. Limited outdoor storage areas are available on site.
G. Store products in accordance with manufacturers instructions with seals and labels intact and legible.
END OF SECTION 01600
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS iA PROJECT NO. 1624 01600-6 SECTION 01700 - CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. General construction and installation procedures. 2. Correction of defective work. 3. Cleaning during construction. 4. Facility startup. 5. Instruction of the owner's personnel. 6. Project completion procedures. 7. Final extermination. 8. Final cleaning.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Concealed Spaces: Spaces which are not accessible after completion of construction.
B. Damage: Any sort of deterioration whether due to weather, normal wear and tear, accident, or abuse, resulting in soiling, marring, breakage, corrosion, rotting, or impairment of function.
C. Debris: Rubbish, waste materials, litter, volatile wastes, and similar materials, with the exception of surplus materials which are to become the property of the owner.
D. Fire Barriers: Any wall, floor, ceiling, or roof which is indicated as having a fire resistance rating.
E. Operational Elements: Equipment, moving parts, electrical conductors, sound and vibration control materials, waterproofing, vapor retarders, piping, ducts, tanks, and other similar materials and components which convey or retard the passage of liquids, gases, heat, light, persons, animals, or insects or which perform a similar function; not including structural elements.
1. Safety-Related Elements: Materials and assemblies whose principal function is the promotion of the safety of the building and its occupants, including fire and smoke barriers, fireproofing, emergency egress doors and windows, guardrails, equipment guards, and other similar construction.
F. Smoke Barriers: Any wall, floor, ceiling, or roof which is indicated as being designed to prevent passage of smoke and gases; may be indicated as "smoke barrier," "smoke partitions," "smoke wall," or similar designation.
G. Spaces Not Normally Occupied: Accessible spaces such as roofs, accessible plenums and shafts, accessible spaces above ceilings, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, accessible attics, and similar spaces, but not including the interior of duct or concealed spaces.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Field Correction Requests: Submit immediately upon discovery of deviation required; include a detailed description of the problem, recommended changes, and reasons it is not possible to comply with the contract documents.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700-1
B. Certificate of Final Extermination.
C. Startup Reports:
1. Submit within 7 days after startup of item covered by report. 2. Include a statement that the item has been installed properly and is functioning correctly. 3. Include the following information: a. Item started operation. b. Date of startup operation. c. Entity performing startup. d. Applicable specification section. e. Results of startup. f. Signature of person performing startup.
D. Demonstration Reports:
1. Submit within 7 days after each demonstration period. 2. Include the following information: a. Description of equipment or system demonstrated, cross-referenced to the contract documents. b. Date of demonstration. c. Name and title of person performing demonstration. d. Name, title, and signature of person observing demonstration.
E. Instruction Reports:
1. Submit within 7 days after each instruction period. 2. Include the following information: a. Description of instruction provided, cross-referenced to the contract documents. b. Date(s) and duration of instruction. c. Names and titles of persons performing instruction. d. Names, titles, and signatures of persons receiving instruction.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cleaning: Perform cleaning in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer or fabricator of the product or system. Use only cleaning materials and tools which are specifically recommended, which are not hazardous to health or property, and which will not damage finishes.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Take precautions to prevent fires and to facilitate fire-fighting operations.
1. Keep flammable materials in non-combustible containers; store away from potential fire sources; remove flammable waste regularly. 2. Keep temporary and permanent fire fighting facilities readily accessible; keep fire fighting routes open. 3. Do not allow smoking in areas where highly combustible or explosive materials are present. 4. Carefully supervise the operation of potential fire sources, including heating units. 5. Conduct welding operations in manner to prevent fire; comply with local regulations.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700-2
B. Take precautions to prevent accidents due to physical hazards:
1. Provide barricades, warning lights, or signs as required to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. 2. Safety barricades: Comply with regulations. 3. Provide temporary walkways where walking surfaces are hazardous.
C. Take care to prevent pollution of air, water, and soil.
1. Comply with environmental protection regulations. 2. Limit effluent and rainwater runoff into waterways as required by regulations. 3. Do not dump contaminants in areas that will result in contamination of waterways.
D. Minimize discharge of effluent and rainwater runoff into sewers.
1. Control sediment discharge into sewers; filter out construction debris, soil, and contaminants. 2. Comply with regulations and orders of public utilities regarding use of sewers. 3. Where disposal of effluent or rainwater by means of sewers is not lawful or is not possible, provide alternative methods of disposal.
E. Prevent erosion due to rainwater runoff.
F. Control windblown dust; prevent erosion to site and nuisance to neighbors.
G. Prevent flooding of excavations, below-grade construction, and adjacent properties due to rainwater runoff.
H. Protect existing property indicated to remain, including:
1. Plants and trees, as indicated on the drawings and as identified by owner. Erect fencing around drip lines of trees. Areas within the drip lines of trees shall be off limits to construction activities including but not limited to parking and storage of materials. 2. Existing property, as indicated on the drawings.
I. Do not use tools or equipment which produce harmful levels of noise.
J. Keep the site and adjacent public ways free of hazardous and unsanitary conditions and public nuisances.
K. Control rodents and other pests; prevent infestation of adjacent sites and buildings due to pests on this site.
L. Keep public streets free of debris and material storage due to this work.
M. Provide adequate traffic control by means of signs, signals, and flagmen, as necessary.
N. Provide temporary means of draining roofs where required.
O. Conduct construction operations so that no part of the work and no part of the existing construction is subjected to damaging operations or influences which are in excess of those to be expected during normal occupancy conditions. HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700-3
P. Conduct construction operations so that waste of power, water, and fuel is avoided.
Q. Provide temporary supports as required to prevent movement and structural failure.
R. Install products only during environmental conditions which will ensure the best possible results.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Install products only at the time and in the sequence which will ensure the best possible results.
B. Coordinate required administrative activities with related construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700-4
3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 6. Conditions which could have been discovered by examination will not be allowed as cause for claims for extra work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to the local utility and the Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General:
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700-5
D. Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities.
3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
I. Coordinate exact locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
J. Install work in such manner and sequence as to preclude, if possible, or at least to minimize, cutting and patching. 1. Do not cut any structural elements.
K. Existing Construction:
1. Perform work in existing construction in same manner as for new construction unless otherwise specified. 2. Where a new surface exposed to view is an extension of any existing surface, align both surfaces without a change of plane and make a neat transition between finishes. HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700-6
a. If a change of plane is necessary due to the configuration of the existing surface, obtain instructions from the architect. 3. Where portions of existing work are removed, patch remaining work with neat transitions between remaining surfaces without evidence of cutting. a. Where neat transitions between remaining surfaces are not possible due to configuration of existing surfaces, obtain instructions from the architect. 4. Where existing construction is removed, remove existing utility services located within or upon the existing construction. a. Cap cut ends of abandoned piping, conduit, and duct in such a manner that they are concealed in finish work.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700-7
I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
L. Protect installed work from soiling and damage. 1. Provide protective coverings as required. 2. Provide protective coverings for work which may be damaged by subsequent operations. 3. Where heavy abuse is expected, use minimum of plywood for protection. 4. Maintain protective coverings until substantial completion. 5. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS
A. Install all products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, whether conveyed in writing or not.
B. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount at heights directed by the architect.
C. Separate incompatible materials with suitable materials or spacing. 5. Prevent cathodic corrosion.
D. Provide all anchors and fasteners required and use methods necessary to securely fasten work. 1. Allow for thermal expansion and contraction, and for building movement.
E. After installation, adjust operating components to proper operation.
3.03 PROCEDURES FOR CORRECTION OF WORK
A. The following must be replaced (repair is not acceptable):
1. Damaged surfaces exposed to view which cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. 2. Components which cannot be repaired to proper operating condition. 3. Chipped and broken glass. 4. Scratched transparent materials. 5. Scratched reflective surfaces.
B. Repair or Replace:
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700-8
1. Components which do not operate properly. 2. Surfaces exposed to view which cannot be cleaned to original condition. 3. Permanent facilities used during construction. 4. Other defective work.
C. Acceptable Repair Methods:
1. Replacing parts. 2. Refinishing. 3. Touching up with matching materials. 4. Proper adjustment of equipment.
D. When it is necessary to deviate from the contract documents in order to accomplish corrective action, submit a field correction request.
E. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
F. Restore existing facilities used during construction, and existing facilities affected by construction operations, to original condition.
3.04 FACILITY STARTUP
A. Put each item of equipment and each system into full, satisfactory operation.
B. Prior to Startup:
1. Verify that equipment and systems are complete, correctly connected to utilities, and tested. a. Comply with requirements of manufacturer. 2. Inspect and test as required to ensure that work is installed as specified and to determine suitability for energizing. 3. Provide power and fuel for startup and testing. 4. Change over from temporary to permanent utility sources. 5. Re-adjust and lubricate operating components as required to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. a. Check drive rotations, belt tension, control sequences, and other features which might cause damage if not properly adjusted. 6. When specified or when required by manufacturer, have manufacturer's representative prepare for startup or supervise such preparation.
C. Notify the architect at least 5 days prior to startup of each item and system.
D. Execute startup under supervision of responsible personnel in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. When specified or when required by manufacturer, have manufacturer's representative perform startup.
E. After startup, adjust equipment and systems as required for proper operation.
1. Where specified, perform tests or inspections to determine status of operation.
F. Demonstrate the operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to personnel designated HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700-9
by the owner, prior to final payment.
1. Have final operating and maintenance data available during demonstration.
G. For equipment and systems which have different operation at different seasons, demonstrate operation during subsequent seasons until fully demonstrated.
3.5 INSTRUCTION OF THE OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Instruct personnel designated by the OWNER in the operation and maintenance of equipment and systems, prior to final payment.
1. Explain all modes of operation and types of maintenance required. 2. Demonstrate all functions, including startup, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown. 3. Review terms of warranties and procedures for obtaining warranty service. 4. Review maintenance agreements and other similar commitments which extend past final completion. 5. Have operating and maintenance data available for use during instruction. a. Review contents in detail. b. Prepare and insert additional data when need for such becomes apparent during instruction.
B. Arrange times and places of instruction with the University.
1. Provide a minimum of 1 hour of instruction for each item of equipment and each system, unless otherwise specified.
C. Provide instruction by qualified personnel of the contractor, unless otherwise specified.
D. For equipment and systems which have different operation at different seasons, provide instruction during subsequent seasons until all modes of operation have been covered.
3.6 FINAL CLEANING
A. Remove materials and equipment which are not part of the work and all debris from the site prior to substantial completion.
1. Remove all surplus materials which are to remain property of the contractor; obtain the owner's instructions as to disposition of surplus material remaining on site and deliver, store, or dispose of as directed. 2. Remove protective coverings. 3. Remove temporary facilities.
B. Dispose of debris in a lawful manner.
1. Do not burn or bury debris on the site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes in storm or sanitary drains.
C. Perform final cleaning prior to requesting inspection for substantial completion. HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700- 10
1. Use only professional cleaners. 2. Clean to the level of cleanliness that would be expected by a commercial building owner from a janitorial service.
D. Clean entire project site and grounds.
1. Clean up landscaped areas. 2. Broom clean paved areas. 3. Rake smooth all exposed earth surfaces. 4. Remove snow and ice from building and site accesses.
E. In spaces to be occupied, remove dirt, stains, and other foreign substances from all accessible surfaces and remove nonpermanent labels.
F. Remove debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and roof drains.
G. In spaces not normally occupied, remove debris and surface dust and wipe equipment clean, removing excess lubrication, paint, and other foreign substances.
H. Remove paint and other coatings from permanent labels and from mechanical and electrical equipment nameplates.
I. Leave the project clean and ready for occupancy.
3.7 PROJECT COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Complete the work, prior to substantial completion, as required to obtain consent to occupancy from the governing authorities.
B. Arrange for final inspections by governing authorities to be accomplished prior to substantial completion.
1. Obtain certificate of occupancy.
C. Prepare as built drawings.
D. If temporary locking systems differ from permanent locking systems, change over to permanent systems prior to substantial completion.
E. Final Extermination: Engage a licensed exterminator to make final inspection and rid the project of rodents, insects, and other pests.
END OF SECTION 01700
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01700- 11
SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. 4. Procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 5. B. Use specified cutting and patching procedures when cutting or patching is required for any of the following activities: 1. Fitting the parts of the work together. 2. Modifying existing construction. 3. Repairing existing work to remain. 4. Installing ill-timed work. 5. Removing and replacing defective and nonconforming work. 6. Removing samples of work for testing. 7. Making openings in elements of work for penetrations, such as for piping, conduit, duct, and the like. 8. Uncovering work for observation. 9. Repairing damage.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evi- dence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatis- factory manner.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CUTTING AND PATCHING iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01731-1
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
B. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
C. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.5 1.5 WARRANTY
A. A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or dam- aged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void ex- isting warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Patching Materials: Identical to the materials of the work to be cut, unless indicated as specific ma- terials specified in other sections. 1. For exposed materials for closing up openings, use materials identical to those of the adja cent construction; concealed materials are not required to be identical. 2. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used, use materials that provide best visual match; obtain approval of the architect. 3. Use materials that perform equally as well as, or better than, the material cut. 4. If necessary, determine composition of existing materials to be patched by testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, includ- ing compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Take precautions to avoid damage to unanticipated utilities and structural elements. If such elements are encountered, report nature and extent to the architect and request instructions as to how to proceed. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CUTTING AND PATCHING iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01731-2
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patch- ing at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 2. Where new work is inserted into or through the work that is cut, fit the patched work tightly to the new work. 3. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.
B. Concealed Work: Uncover the concealed work, cut and patch, and patch the covering work.
C. Concrete and Masonry: Use saws or drills which produce a neat cut; remove in small sections.
D. Insulation: Replace insulation whenever it is cut in order to modify the element it is insulating.
E. Slabs on Grade: Use methods that will not crack or disturb adjacent slabs or partitions.
F. Operational Elements: Maintain capacity to perform in the manner intended, including energy per- formance; do not cut or patch in any manner that would increase maintenance requirement, de- crease life expectancy, or decrease safety.
G. Safety-Related Elements: Do not cut or patch in a manner that would result in decreased safety.
H. Fire/Smoke Barriers: Do not cut more than absolutely necessary. 1. Cut penetration holes to sizes required for penetration seal assemblies required. 2. Patch all oversize holes and cuts made in error. 3. Perform patching in a manner which complies in all respects with the original construction; if not possible, report nature of difficulty to the architect and request instructions.
I. Protect that part of the project which is exposed during cutting and patching operations from ad- verse weather.
J. Cover openings made whenever they are not in use.
3.4 Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar op- erations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoin- ing construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with origi- nal Installer's written recommendations.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CUTTING AND PATCHING iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01731-3
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete/Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond- core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be re- moved. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent en- trance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
B. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and con- struction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide in- sulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations fol- lowing performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demon- strate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. For continuous surfaces, extend refinish to nearest intersection, with a neat transition to adjacent surfaces. b. For assemblies: Refinish entire unit. c. Painted piping, conduit, and duct: Clean and repaint. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface contain- ing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Remove and replace work which is patched in a visually unacceptable manner.
END OF SECTION 01731
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CUTTING AND PATCHING iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01731-4
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not lim- ited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Warranties. 4. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 5. Final cleaning.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, com- plete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or set- tlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Archi- tect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contrac- tor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01770 -1 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, com- plete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. [Submit demonstration and training videotapes.]
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or cor- rected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: If reinspection is required because the contractor has failed to complete punchlist items the contractor agrees to pay for the architect's time required to inspect and document the first inspection. The contractor will request re-inspection after payment is made and when the Work identi- fied in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. a.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain and protect Project Record Documents and Fire Marshal Review Documents at the site from deterioration and loss. Provide ac- cess to Project Record Documents and Fire Marshal set for Architect's or Inspector's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcon- tractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before en- closing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 6. Before substantial completion review record drawings with the architect. Upon authorization by the ar- chitect prepare a full set of transparencies and electronic files of the contract drawings with all record- ed changes marked 7. The architect will make available original drawing files for the contractor to prepare as-built docu- ments. Electronic files shall be prepared as follows: a. Autocad release 2000 or later
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01770 -2 b. Provide new layers - CO1-All for all items changed or modified by Change Order 1. Each sub- sequent Change Order would be located on separate layers with similar nomenclature, (CO2, CO3…) (ADDEN1….for addendum changes), (FIELD1…. For field modification and actual conditions). c. As-Built set shall include all drawings whether changed or not. d. Electronic files shall be submitted on CD's.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifi- cations. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment fur- nished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable.
D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's writ- ten instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where applicable.
E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. c. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds.
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
C.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01770 -3 1.7 WARRANTIES
A. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as nec- essary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identi- fy the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
B. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the sur- face to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equip- ment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, pro- vide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner, with at least ten days advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content.
B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training mod- ule, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01770 -4 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign de- posits. c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glaz- ing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show ev- idence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical name- plates. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign sub- stances. l. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of dif- fusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of ro- dents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess mate- rials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES iA PROJECT NO. 1625 01770 -5 SECTION 07540 - POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Overlay existing metal roof.
B. Membrane adhered with solvent-based adhesive.
C. Prime Roof Board, attached with mechanical fasteners.
D. Type VIII EPS (Flute Filler), loosely laid.
E. Prefabricated flashings, corners, parapets, stacks, vents, and related details.
F. Fasteners, adhesives, and other accessories required for a complete roofing installation.
G. Traffic Protection.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NRCA - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
B. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads For Buildings And Other Structures.
C. UL - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory, Roofing Systems (TGFU.R10128).
D. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
E. ASTM D 751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics.
F. ASTM D 4434 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing.
G. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
H. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Physical Properties:
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540-1
1. Roof product must meet the requirements of Type III PVC sheet roofing as defined by ASTM D 4434 and must meet or exceed the following physical properties.
2. Thickness: 80 mil, nominal, in accordance with ASTM D 751.
3. Thickness Over Scrim: ≥ 41 mil in accordance with ASTM D 7635.
4. Breaking Strengths: ≥ 481 lbf. (MD) and ≥ 341 lbf. (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method.
5. Elongation at Break: ≥ 33% (MD) and ≥ 33% (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method.
6. Tearing Strength: ≥ 53 lbf. (MD) and ≥ 196 lbf. (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 751, Procedure B.
7. Low Temperature Bend (Flexibility): Pass at -40 °F in accordance with ASTM D 2136.
8. Linear Dimensional Change: < 0.10% (MD) and 0.10% (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 1204 at 176 ± 2 °F for 6 hours.
9. Water Absorption: < 0.1% in accordance with ASTM D 570 at 158 °F for 166 hours.
10. Static Puncture Resistance: ≥ 33 lbs. in accordance with ASTM D 5602.
11. Dynamic Puncture Resistance: ≥ 14.7 ft-lbf. in accordance with ASTM D 5635.
12. Membrane must be certified to NSF 347 sustainability standard. Minimum Gold Certification.
D. Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC):
1. Membrane must be listed on CRRC website.
a. Initial Solar Reflectance: ≥ 85%
b. Initial Solar Reflective Index (SRI): ≥ 108
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540-2
3. Installation methods.
4. Maintenance requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate insulation pattern, overall membrane layout, field seam locations, joint or termination detail conditions, and location of fasteners.
D. Verification Samples: For each product specified, two samples, representing actual product, color, and finish.
1. 4 inch by 6 inch sample of roofing membrane, of color specified.
2. 4 inch by 6 inch sample of walkway pad.
3. Termination bar, fascia bar with cover, drip edge and gravel stop if to be used.
4. Each fastener type to be used for installing membrane, insulation/recover board, termination bar and edge details.
E. Installer Certification: Certification from the roofing system manufacturer that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
F. Manufacturer's warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer specializing in the production of PVC membranes systems and utilizing a Quality Control Manual during the production of the membrane roofing system that has been approved by and is inspected by Underwriters Laboratories.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of roofing systems similar to those specified in this project and approved by the roofing system manufacturer.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from roofing membrane manufacturer.
E. There shall be no deviations from the roof membrane manufacturer's specifications or the approved shop drawings without the prior written approval of the manufacturer.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly wind uplift and fire hazard requirements.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540-3
B. Fire Exposure: Provide membrane roofing materials with the following fire-test-response characteristics. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure:
a. Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119 for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part.
3. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements.
C. Wind Uplift:
1. Roofing System Design: Provide a roofing system designed to resist uplift pressures calculated according to the current edition of the ASCE-7 Specification Minimum Design Loads for Buildings And Other Structures.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene meeting not less than one week before starting work of all sections.
B. Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system including, but not limited to, the following.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.
4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540-4
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Store roof materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.
E. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Contractor's Warranty: The contractor shall warrant the roof application with respect to workmanship and proper application for two (2) years from the effective date of the warranty issued by the manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Must be no-dollar limit type and provide for completion of repairs, replacement of membrane or total replacement of the roofing system at the then-current material and labor prices throughout the life of the warranty. In addition the warranty must meet the following criteria:
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date issued by the manufacturer.
2. No exclusion for damage caused by ponding water.
3. No exclusion for damage caused by biological growth.
4. Issued direct from and serviced by the roof membrane manufacturer.
5. Transferable for the full term of the warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Duro-Last Roofing, Inc., which is located at: 525 Morley Drive, Saginaw, MI 48601. Telephone: 800-248-0280.
B. GAF which is located at: 1 Campus Drive, Parsippany, New Jersey 07054 Telephone 1.973.628.3000
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540-5
C. Garland Company, Inc. (The), which is located at: 3800 E. 91st St.; Cleveland, OH 44105; Toll Free Tel: 800-321-9336; Tel: 216-641-7500
D. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of section 01600.
2.2 ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Roofing Membrane: Membrane conforming to ASTM D 4434, type III, fabric-reinforced, PVC, NSF/ANSI 347 Gold Certification, and a product-specific third-party verified Environmental Product Declaration. Membrane properties as follows:
1. Thickness:
a. 80 mil, nominal.
2. Exposed Face Color:
a. White.
3. Minimum recycle content 7% post-industrial and 0% post-consumer.
4. Recycled at end of life into resilient flooring or concrete expansion joints.
B. Accessory Materials: Provide accessory materials.
1. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard reinforced PVC sheet flashing.
2. Manufacturer's standard reinforced PVC membrane.
a. Stack Flashings.
b. Curb Flashings.
c. Inside and Outside Corners.
3. Sealants and Adhesives: Compatible with roofing system.
a. Caulk
b. Strip Mastic.
4. Slip Sheet: Compatible with roofing system.
5. Fasteners and Plates: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane and insulation to substrate.
a. #15 Extra Heavy Duty Fasteners.
b. 3 inch Metal Plates.
6. Termination and Edge Details: HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540-6
a. Termination Bar.
b. Vinyl Coated Metal Drip Edge.
7. Vinyl Coated Metal: 24 gauge, hot-dipped galvanized, grade 90 metal with a minimum of 17 mil of membrane laminated to one side.
C. Substrate Board:
1. Glass-mat-faced, water-resistant gypsum substrate conforming to ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, Prime Roof Board as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
a. ½ inch thick.
D. Walkways:
1. Provide non-skid, maintenance-free walkway pads in areas of heavy foot traffic and around mechanical equipment.
a. Walkway Pad.
2.3 FLUTE FILLER
A. Flute Filler:
1. Provide precut insulation to fill the flutes between the ribs of the metal roof.
a. EPS Type II (flat).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that the surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that the deck is supported and secured.
C. Verify that the deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped to drains, valleys, eaves, scuppers or gutters.
D. Verify that the deck surfaces are dry and free of standing water, ice or snow.
E. Verify that all roof openings or penetrations through the roof are solidly set.
F. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another contractor, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
G. Verify/Test existing substrate not meeting manufacturer’s requirements for substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540-7
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Surfaces shall be clean, smooth, free of fins, sharp edges, loose and foreign material, oil, grease, and bitumen.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in accordance with the roof manufacturer's requirements.
B. Separation Board: Prime Roof Board.
1. Use only fasteners, stress plates and fastening patterns accepted for use by the roof manufacturer. Fastening patterns must meet applicable design requirements. a. Install fasteners in accordance with the roof manufacturer’s requirements. Fasteners that are improperly installed must be replaced or corrected. b. Attach boards in parallel courses with end joints staggered 50% and adjacent boards butted together with no gaps greater than ¼ inch. C. Roof Membrane: 80 mil, nominal, membrane.
1. Use only membrane adhesive acceptable to the roof manufacturer’s that meets the applicable design requirements.
a. Solvent-based membrane adhesive.
2. Cut membrane to fit neatly around all penetrations and roof projections.
3. Unroll roofing membrane and positioned with a minimum 6 inch overlap.
4. Apply adhesive in accordance with the roof manufacturer’s requirements.
a. Apply at the required rate in smooth, even coatings without voids, globs, puddles or similar irregularities. Use care not to contaminate the area of the membrane where hot air welding will occur.
5. Apply adhesive to both the substrate and the bottom side of roof membrane.
6. Follow guidelines outlined in the adhesive’s Product Data Sheet.
7. Read the adhesive’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) prior to using the adhesive.
D. Seaming:
1. Weld overlapping sheets together using hot air. Minimum weld width is 1-1/2 inches.
2. Check field welded seams for continuity and integrity and repair all imperfections by the end of each work day.
E. Membrane Termination/Securement: All membrane terminations shall be completed in
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540-8
accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
1. Provide securement at all membrane terminations at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, curb flashing, skylight, expansion joint, interior wall, penthouse, and other similar condition.
2. Provide securement at any angle change where the slope or combined slopes exceeds two inches in one horizontal foot.
F. Flashings: Complete all flashings and terminations as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
1. Provide securement at all membrane terminations at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, curb flashing, skylight, expansion joint, interior wall, penthouse, and other similar condition.
a. Do not apply flashing over existing thru-wall flashings or weep holes.
b. Secure flashing on a vertical surface before the seam between the flashing and the main roof sheet is completed.
c. Extend flashing membrane a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) onto the main roof sheet beyond the mechanical securement.
d. Use care to ensure that the flashing does not bridge locations where there is a change in direction (e.g. where the parapet meets the roof deck).
2. Penetrations:
a. Flash all pipes, supports, soil stacks, cold vents, and other penetrations passing through the roofing membrane as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
b. Utilize custom prefabricated flashings supplied by the membrane manufacturer.
c. Existing Flashings: Remove when necessary to allow new flashing to terminate directly to the penetration.
3. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shapes:
a. Clusters of pipes or other penetrations which cannot be sealed with prefabricated membrane flashings shall be sealed by surrounding them with a prefabricated vinyl-coated metal pitch pan and sealant supplied by the membrane manufacturer.
b. Vinyl-coated metal pitch pans shall be installed, flashed and filled with sealant in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
c. Pitch pans shall not be used where prefabricated or field fabricated flashings are possible.
G. Roof Drains:
1. Coordinate installation of roof drains and vents specified in Section 15146 - Plumbing Specialties. HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540-9
2. Remove existing flashing and asphalt at existing drains in preparation for sealant and membrane.
3. Provide a smooth clean surface on the mating surface between the clamping ring and the drain base.
H. Edge Details:
1. Provide edge details as indicated on the Drawings. Install in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
2. Join individual sections in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
3. Coordinate installation of metal flashing and counter flashing specified in Section 07620.
4. Manufactured Roof Specialties: Coordinate installation of copings, counter flashing systems, gutters, downspouts, and roof expansion assemblies specified in Section 07710.
I. Walkways:
1. Install walkways in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements.
2. Provide walkways where indicated on the Drawings.
3. Install walkway pads at roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders and all other traffic concentration points regardless of traffic frequency. Provided in areas receiving regular traffic to service rooftop units or where a passageway over the surface is required.
4. Do not install walkways over flashings or field seams until manufacturer’s warranty inspection has been completed.
J. Water cut-offs:
1. Provide water cut-offs on a daily basis at the completion of work and at the onset of inclement weather.
2. Provide water cut-offs to ensure that water does not flow beneath the completed sections of the new roofing system.
3. Remove water cut-offs prior to the resumption of work.
4. The integrity of the water cut-off is the sole responsibility of the roofing contractor.
5. Any membrane contaminated by the cut-off material shall be cleaned or removed.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The membrane manufacturer’s representative shall provide a comprehensive final inspection after completion of the roof system. All application errors shall be addressed HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540- 10
and final punch list completed.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed roofing products from construction operations until completion of project.
B. Where traffic is anticipated over completed roofing membrane, protect from damage using durable materials that are compatible with membrane.
C. Repair or replace damaged products after work is completed.
END OF SECTION
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING iA PROJECT NO. 1624 07540- 11
SECTION 23 34 01 – INDUSTRIAL FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes 1. The ceiling-mounted circulation fan is the model scheduled with the capacities indicated. The fan shall be furnished with standard mounting hardware and variable speed control to provide cooling and destratification. 2. The fan speed control system is the model scheduled with the capacities indicated. The fan shall be furnished with a wall controller and upper temperature sensor to provide speed control of up to four (4) industrial grade fans. B. Summary of Work 1. Installation of the fan, miscellaneous or structural metal work (if required), field electrical wiring, cable, conduit, fuses and disconnect switches, other than those addressed in the installation scope of work, shall be provided by others. Factory installation services shall be available. Consult the appropriate installation scope of work for information on the available factory installation options, overview of customer and installer responsibilities, and details on installation site requirements. 2. Installation of the wall controller and upper temperature sensor, field electrical wiring, cable, conduit, fuses, and disconnect switches, other than those address in the installation scope of work, shall be provided by others. Consult the appropriate installation scope of work for information on the available factory installation options, overview of customer and installer responsibilities, and details on installation site requirements.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 21 00 00 Fire Suppression B. 23 00 00 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) C. 26 00 00 Electrical D. 23 09 13 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC E. 25 00 00 Integrated Automation
1.3 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) B. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) C. Restriction of Hazardous Substances (ROHS) D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) F. National Electric Code (NEC) G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Drawings detailing product dimensions, weight, and attachment methods. B. Part 2 Product Data: Specification sheets on the ceiling-mounted fan and fan speed control system, specifying electrical and installation requirements, features and benefits, and controller information. C. Revit Files: File provided for architectural design. D. Installation Guide: The manufacturer shall furnish a copy of all operating and maintenance instructions for the fan. All data is subject to change without notice. E. Schedule
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INDUSTRIAL FANS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 01-1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certifications 1. The fan assembly, as a system, shall be Intertek/ETL-certified and built pursuant to the guidelines set forth by UL standard 507 and CSA standard 22.2 No. 113. 2. The fan shall be compliant with NFPA 13—Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 72— National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, and NFPA 70-2011—National Electric Code (NEC). 3. Controllers shall comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) and Underwriters Laboratory (UL) standards and shall be labeled where required by code. B. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. The fan and any accessories shall be supplied by Maufacturer, which has a minimum of ten (10) years of product experience, or approved equal. 2. ISO 9001-certified
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver product in original, undamaged packaging with identification labels intact. The fan shall be new, free from defects, and factory tested. B. The fan and its components must be stored in a safe, dry location until installation. C. The wall control components shall be new, free from defects, and factory tested. The product is packaged in static shielding materials for ESD protection.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall replace any products or components defective in material or workmanship for the customer free of charge (including transportation charges within the USA, FOB Lexington, KY), pursuant to the complete terms and conditions of the Maufacturer Non-Prorated Warranty in accordance to the following schedule: Airfoils Lifetime (Parts) Hub Lifetime (Parts) Motor 15 years (Parts)† Gearbox 15 years (Parts)† Light Kit 5 Years (Parts) Variable Frequency Drive 15 years (Parts)† Wall Control components 1 year (Parts) All other fan components 15 years (Parts)† Labor 1 year † 15-year parts warranty only valid with factory installation; 7-year parts without factory installation. “Lifetime” means a period ending seven (7) years after Maufacturer discontinues manufacturing the product, as such period is defined by Maufacturer. †† All reasonable costs of repair or replacement will be paid or reimbursed provided customer obtains pre- approval; full warranty contains details.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Delta T Corporation, dba Big Ass S, PO Box 11307, Lexington, Kentucky 40575. Phone (877) 244-3267. Fax (859) 233-0139. Website: www.bigassfans.com or an approved equal.
2.2 HIGH VOLUME, LOW SPEED FANS –
A. Complete Unit 1. Regulatory Requirements: The entire fan assembly (without light kit) shall be Intertek/ETL-certified HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INDUSTRIAL FANS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 01-2 and built pursuant to the construction guidelines set forth by UL standard 507 and CSA standard 22.2. 2. Sustainability Characteristics: The fan shall be designed to move an effective amount of air for cooling and destratification in a variety of applications (including industrial and agricultural) over an extended life. The fan components shall be designed specifically for high volume, low speed fans to ensure lower operational noise. Sound levels from the fan operating at maximum speed measured in a laboratory setting shall not exceed 55 dBA. Actual results of sound measurements in the field may vary due to sound reflective surfaces and environmental conditions. 3. Good workmanship shall be evident in all aspects of construction. Field balancing of the airfoils shall not be necessary. B. Onboard Fan Control 1. The onboard fan controller shall be constructed using a variable frequency drive (VFD) that is pre-wired to the motor and factory-programmed to minimize the starting and braking torques for smooth and efficient operation. The onboard controller shall be prewired to the motor using a short run of flexible conduit with a dedicated ground conductor to minimize electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI). A 15-ft incoming power cord shall be pre-wired to the controller with one of the following plugs: NEMA L6-20P Twist-Lock Plug, NEMA L6-30P Twist-Lock Plug, NEMA L15-20P Twist Lock Plug, NEMA L16-20P Twist-Lock Plug. 2. As an option, the architect or owner may upgrade to the “harsh environment package,” which includes a seal for the weather-resistant onboard VFD enclosure and a motor with IP55 NEMA classification. C. Airfoil System 1. The fan shall be equipped with eight (8) airfoils of precision extruded aluminum alloy. The airfoils shall be connected by means of two (2) high strength locking bolts per airfoil. The airfoils shall be connected to the hub and interlocked with zinc plated steel retainers. 2. The fan shall be equipped with eight (8) winglets on the ends of the airfoils and eight (8) blades positioned on the airfoils at the optimum location for performance. Both the winglet and blades shall be molded of polypropylene. The standard color of the winglet and blade shall be “Safety Yellow.” D. Motor 1. The fan motor shall be an AC induction type inverter rated at one of the following: a. 1725 RPM, 200–240/400–480 VAC, 50/60 Hz, three- phase b. 1725 RPM, 575–600 VAC, 50/60 Hz, three- phase 2. The motor shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) with an IP44 NEMA classification. A NEMA 56C standard frame shall be provided for ease of service. The motor shall be manufactured with a double baked Class F insulation and be capable of continuous operation in -30oF to 122oF (-34oC to 50oC) ambient conditions. 3. As an option, the architect or owner may upgrade to the “harsh environment package,” which includes a motor with an IP55 NEMA classification. As part of the “harsh environment package,” the onboard VFD enclosure is sealed for weather-resistant operation. E. Gearbox 1. The fan gearbox shall be a nitrogen sealed drive. The gearbox shall include a high-efficiency, hermetically sealed, nitrogen-filled, offset helical gear reducer with two-stage gearing, a hollow output shaft, cast iron housing, double lip seals, high quality SKF Explorer Series bearings with crowned cages for optimal lubrication flow, and precision machined gearing to maintain backlash less than 11 arc- minutes over the life of the unit. Lubrication shall be high-grade, low-foaming synthetic oil with extreme pressure additives and a wide temperature range. 2. The gearbox shall be equipped with a hollow shaft threaded to accept a ¾” NPT fitting in which wiring, piping, etc., can be routed to below the fan. A standard junction box can be affixed to this hollow shaft to allow for installing optional features such as lights or cameras. The inclusion of the hollow shaft shall be specified at the time of order. F. Mounting Post 1. The fan shall be equipped with a mounting post that provides a structural connection between the fan assembly and extension tube. The mounting post shall be formed from A36 steel, contain no critical HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INDUSTRIAL FANS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 01-3 welds, and be powder coated for corrosion resistance and appearance. G. Mounting System 1. The fan mounting system shall be designed for quick and secure installation on a variety of structural supports. The mounting yoke shall be of ASTM A-36 steel, welded construction, at least 3/16” thick, and powder coated for appearance and corrosion resistance. No mounting hardware or parts substitutions, including cast aluminum, are acceptable. 2. All mounting bolts shall be SAE Grade 8 or equivalent. H. Hub 1. The fan hub shall be made of precision cut aluminum for high strength and light weight. The hub shall consist of two (2) aluminum plates, eight (8) aluminum spars and one (1) aluminum spacer fastened with a pin and collar rivet system. 2. The hub shall be secured to the output shaft of the gearbox by means of (10) high strength bolts. The hub shall incorporate five (5) safety retaining clips made of 1/4” (0.6 cm) thick steel that shall restrain the hub/airfoil assembly. I. Safety Cable 1. The fan shall be equipped with a safety cable that provides an additional means of securing the fan assembly to the building structure. The safety cable shall be Ø3/8” (1 cm) diameter and fabricated out of 7 x 19 galvanized steel cable. The end loops shall be secured with swaged sleeves, pre-loaded and tested to 3,200 lbf (13,345 N). 2. Field construction of safety cables is not permitted. J. Wall Controller 1. Regulatory Requirements: The fan speed control system shall be compliant with NFPA 70-2011— National Electric Code (NEC). 2. Sustainability Characteristics: The system shall be designed to automatically control the speed of Big Ass Fans from the locations of the wall controller and upper temperature sensor to maximize energy savings and user comfort. The system shall be designed specifically for high volume, low speed Maufacturer, and receives information from user-determined settings and temperature sensors. 3. Good workmanship shall be evident in all aspects of installation. 4. The wall control shall be a digital keypad device with an internal temperature sensor. It shall be wall- mounted centrally within the fan zone at head height using two (2) provided 6-32 x 7/8” pan head screws and four (4) provided 6-32 countersink. 5. The wall controller shall be enclosed in a cast zinc cover measuring 3.86” (9.8 cm) x 7.25” (18.4 mm) x 1” (2.5 cm) and be made of heavy-duty steel. 6. The wall controller includes a Class II AC Adapter power cord. 7. The wall controller only provides a speed reference for the fan. Start and stop functions are controlled by the auxiliary controller. 8. The mounting location shall meet the requirements of OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.303(g) for accessibility minimum clearances. K. Upper Temperature Sensor 1. The upper temperature sensor shall be mounted in the upper portion of the fan zone either by using a provided I-Beam clamp, or by using four (4) provided mounting screws. 2. The upper temperature sensor shall measure 1.9” (4.8 cm) x 4” (10.2 cm) x 1” (2.5 cm). L. Auxiliary Controller 1. The fan is equipped with an auxiliary controller capable of providing 100% control of all fan functions. The auxiliary controller shall be a digital keypad device mounted within a cast zinc cover. The cover shall be capable of mounting to a standard switch box. 2. Equipped with touchpad controls and an LED display for controlling the fan’s direction, operation, speed, and programming. Communication between the fan VFD and auxiliary controller is by a standard CAT5 (or higher) Ethernet cable. The auxiliary control comes standard with 150 ft of factory- HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INDUSTRIAL FANS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 01-4 assembled CAT5 Ethernet cable. 3. Equipped with a simple diagnostic program to identify faults in the system. Provisions shall be made for retrieving fan operation and diagnostic data (fault messages) through the auxiliary controller. M. Fire Control Panel Integration 1. Includes a 10–30 VDC pilot relay for seamless fire control panel integration. The pilot relay can be wired Normally Open or Normally Closed in the field .N. Guy wires 1. Included for installations with extension tubes 4 ft (1.2 m) or longer to limit the potential for lateral movement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Fan location must have a typical bar joist or existing I-beam structure from which to mount the fan. Additional mounting options may be available. B. Mounting structure must be able to support weight and operational torque of fan. Consult structural engineer if necessary. C. Fan location must be free from obstacles such as lights, cables, or other building components. D. Check fan location for proper electrical requirements. Consult installation guide for appropriate circuit requirements. E. Each fan requires dedicated branch circuit protection. F. Route power to within six (6) feet of the wall controller location. If additional distance is needed to power the wall controller, consult the alternative wiring method instructions in the Installation Guide.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The fan shall be installed by a factory-certified installer according to the manufacturer’s Installation Guide, which includes acceptable structural dimensions and proper sizing and placement of angle iron for bar joist applications. Maufacturer recommends consulting a structural engineer for installation methods outside the manufacturer’s recommendation and a certification, in the form of a stamped print or letter, submitted prior to installation. B. Minimum Distances 1. Airfoils must be at least 10 ft (3 m) above the floor. 2. Installation area must be free of obstructions such as lights, cables, sprinklers or other building structures with the airfoils at least 2 ft (0.61 m) clear of all obstructions. 3. The structure the fan is attached to shall be capable of supporting a torque load of up to 300 ft·lb (407 N·m) of torque C. The fan shall not be located where it will be continuously subjected to wind gusts or in close proximity to the outputs of HVAC systems or radiant heaters. Additional details are in the Maufacturer 3.2 Installation Manual. D. In buildings equipped with sprinklers, including ESFR sprinklers, fan installation shall comply with all of the following: 1. The maximum fan diameter shall be 24 ft (7.3 m). 2. The HVLS fan shall be centered approximately between four adjacent sprinklers. 3. The vertical clearance from the HVLS fan to the sprinkler deflector shall be a minimum of 3 ft (0.9 m). 4. All HVLS fans shall be interlocked to shut down immediately upon receiving a waterflow signal from the alarm system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. E. The wall control shall be installed by a factory-certified installer according to the Installation Guide. F. The customer shall supply 2-conductor shielded cable (18-22AWG stranded) to connect the wall control components to the fan’s variable frequency drive. The maximum distance between the wall controller and the upper temperature sensor shall be 1000 ft (305 m). HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INDUSTRIAL FANS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 01-5 G. Installation areas must be free of obstructions such as lights, cables, sprinklers, or other structures. H. The components of the wall control must not be mounted adjacent to or above radiant heaters, near HVAC ventilation intakes or exhausts, on poorly insulated exterior walls, in roof decking, or near radiant heat sources, and must be mounted so that they are exposed adequately to circulated air. Additional mounting guidelines can be found in the Installation Guide.
END OF SECTION
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INDUSTRIAL FANS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 01-6 Luminous Infrared Radiant Gas Heater – 23 34 02
Size Range:
37,500 to 150,000 Btuh, Nominal (Input Heating)
Manufacturer Model: Part # Natural Gas Part # Propane Input (Btuh)
primoManufacturer 10 MO-0010-NG MO-0010-LP 37,500
primoManufacturer 15 MO-0015-NG MO-0015-LP 56,000
primoManufacturer 20 MO-0020-NG MO-0020-LP 75,000
primoManufacturer 30 MO-0030-NG MO-0030-LP 113,500
primoManufacturer 40 MO-0040-NG MO-0040-LP 150,000
Part 1 — General
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Indoor overhead mounted, electrically controlled combined intensity infrared radiant heating unit utilizing gas combustion for heating.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Heater will be tested in accordance with ANSI Z83.19A-2002 ~ CSA 2.35A - 2002 B Standards, and additionally in accordance with European Standard EN 419-1, and certified by CSA International. B. Heater will be designed in accordance with European EC Gas Appliances Directive or ISO 9001:2000 and manufactured in a facility registered to EC Gas Appliances Directive or ISO 9001:2000 C. Each heater will be subjected to run testing on the assembly line. D. The heater will be warranted by the manufacturer for defects in material and workmanship for a period of 15 years on the ceramic tiles that comprise the burner panel, and 5 years on all other heater components. E. Manufacturer’s representative to be present for Pre-Install conference. Manufacturer’s representative also to provide startup training and be on site at the time of delivery and startup.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Heater will be stored to secure against damage and handled per manufacturer’s recommendations.
Part 2 — Product
2.01 EQUIPMENT (STANDARD) A. General: Factory assembled, single-piece infrared radiant heating unit for overhead mounted space or area heating application. Supplied with the heater will be all necessary factory installed wiring, piping, and controls required prior to field installation and start-up. HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INFRARED HEATERS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 02-1
B. Primary Emitting Surface: 1. General: a. The primary radiant surface will be comprised of a panel of porous ceramic burner tiles with indentation surface technology creating 372 indentations in each tile radiating surface that will increase the emitting surface area by 50%. b. Ceramic tiles will have a homologous grid of approximately 3400 needled perforations that differ not more than +/- 0.001 inch (0.03 mm) in diameter to create a homogeneous radiant surface. c. Ceramic tiles will have machined perimeter edges so that the burner panel assembly requires no gasket material between contiguous tiles. d. The perimeter of the ceramic tile burner panel will be seated to the heater body utilizing stainless steel gasket material. e. The ceramic tile burner will attain an operating surface temperature of 1740°F (950°C). The ceramic tiles will be able to withstand temperatures of 2012°F (1100°C). f. The ceramic tiles will have an inner porosity of 44% or more to ensure sufficient thermal insulation between radiant burner surface and mixing chamber
C. Secondary Emitting Surface 1. General: A secondary radiant surface will be created by a reflector housing, closed in two dimensions to be in contact with the continuous stream of flue gases
a. Heater body and reflectors will be designed and assembled to a continuous one piece unit without gaps. b. Exhaust gases will heat the interior reflector surfaces to a temperature of 930°F (500°C) so as to emit low intensity infrared radiant heat (dark radiator) c. Heater reflectors will be constructed of high grade steel clad with cold-bonded polished aluminum layer to reach reflectance of at least 90% and ensure durable corrosion protection
D. Heater Body: 1. General: a. Heater body and reflectors will be constructed of high grade steel clad with highly corrosion resistant cold-bonded aluminum. b. Heater body and reflectors will be assembled using press fit and crimp joint construction to provide flexibility during expansion and contraction that result from operation.
C. Mixing Chamber as Additional Heat Exchanger: 1. General: Mixing Chamber will be constructed and located to be an additional exchanger of heat from flue gases to gas/air fuel mixture and will ensure a homogeneous mixture of fuel gas and air.
a. A gas/air fuel mixing chamber will be formed by the assembly of reflectors and body. b. The gas/air fuel is introduced to the mixing chamber through a single venturi located at the end of the chamber. c. The gas/air fuel mixing chamber will ensure that the heat loss of combustion is reduced by heat exchange to preheat the gas/air mixture up to 480°F (250°C) and pressurize the gas/air mixture for consistent and balanced supply to the ceramic tile burner panel. An angle mounted heater will have the mixing chamber located in the upper position to realize the additional heat exchange.
D. Controls and Safeties: 1. General: a. Each individual ceramic tile burner panel will have solid state direct spark ignition and flame sensor control that is dedicated to secure the operation of that burner panel b. Heater gas and ignition controls will be readily accessible for servicing.
2. Ignition and Flame Control: a. Heater will be complete with a low voltage (25Vac), solid state direct spark ignition and ionization flame sensing control module. Electrical Rating: 25Vac, 60Hz with current rating of 0.2A at 25Vac HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INFRARED HEATERS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 02-2 b. Heater will be complete with an igniter/sensor with separate electrodes for spark ignition and flame sensing. c. The ionization module will sense the presence of main burner flame and discontinue spark ignition. If the burner fails to ignite within the trial-for-ignition period, the flame control will go into safety lockout. Reset of the control is manually done from the thermostat. d. The ionization module will check for a false flame condition (short to ground) and lock out if a false flame condition is present. d. The ignition module will have a 21 second trial-for-ignition period e. The ignition module will open the main gas valve and generate 30,000 volts at the spark igniter for direct ignition of the burner. f. On a loss of burner flame the timed trial-for-ignition is repeated. Safety lockout occurs if flame is not reestablished within the trial-for-ignition period. Reset of the control is manually done from the thermostat. g. To complete the direct spark ignition system the system will incorporate a gas control, 25Vac transformer, and: i) For space heating application an Infrared Setback Thermostat as supplied by the manufacturer of the heater ii) or for Arena spectator heating a system control panel as supplied by the manufacturer of the heater
3. Gas Control: a. Heater will be complete with a direct ignition gas control with a manual valve, two automatic operators, and a pressure regulator Electrical Rating: 24Vac, 60Hz; draw 0.5A with both operators energized b. The gas control will have an inlet pressure tap and an outlet pressure tap to facilitate measurement of gas supply and manifold pressures during servicing. c. Heater will be complete with a ½” pipe nipple and ½” union with ½” female NPT for connection to the gas supply.
4. Heater Zone Temperature Control: a. Space Heating: Each heater zone will be controlled by a 24 Vac infrared set-back thermostat (refer Part 4A), or other 24 Vac thermostat as supplied by the manufacturer b. Arena Spectator Heating: Heaters or heater zones will be controlled by an Arena Control Panel (refer Part 4B) as supplied by the manufacturer
5. Installation Requirements and Mechanical Exhaust: a. Installation in Canada: i. Gas fired infrared radiant heating system installation will comply with the manufacturer’s installation instructions, the current national Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code B149.1 and all applicable local codes. ii. The gas fired infrared radiant heating system will be provided with mechanical ventilation at a rate of 300 cfm for each 100,000 Btuh system input or fraction thereof. The ventilation system will be interlocked so that any reduction of the ventilation rate will cause the shutdown of the interlocked heater or group of heaters. b. Installation in the USA: i. Gas fired infrared radiant heating system installation will comply with the manufacturer’s installation instructions, the current National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI 223.1 standards, and all applicable local codes. ii. Natural or mechanical exhaust will be provided for the gas fired infrared radiant heating system at a rate of 4 cfm for every 1,000 Btuh of natural gas system input, or at a rate of 4.5 cfm for every 1,000 Btuh of propane gas system input.
E. Electrical Requirements:
a. Power supply wiring (25Vac, 60Hz) will connect to the heater ignition module as per the wiring diagram in the manual supplied by the manufacturer.
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INFRARED HEATERS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 02-3 b. For each heater or zone of heaters the installer will provide a 120V/24V/60HZ transformer with a capacity of 40VA for the first heater plus 20VA for each additional heater in the zone.
Part 3 — Performance
3.01 Combustion
Heater will ensure controlled surface combustion with complete conversion of fuel and clean
combustion with resultant combustion products C02, H2O, O2 and N2 and will produce limited volumes of noxious components CO (< 100 ppm) and NOx (<20 ppm)
3.02 Safety
a. Clearances to combustibles in all directions will be defined individually per heater in the technical manual as certified by CSA international
b. Clearance to combustibles as certified by CSA International will not exceed:
Inputs 37,500 to 113,000 Btuh: top clearance 18 inches (460 mm) horizontally mounted Inputs 37,500 to 113,000 Btuh: top clearance 24 inches (760 mm) angle mounted Input 150,000 Btuh: top clearance of 26 inches (660 mm) when horizontally mounted Input 150,000 Btuh: top clearance of 48 inches (1200 mm) when angle mounted
3.03 Energy Efficiency - Radiant Coefficient of Appliance Heater will produce and emit both high and low intensity radiant heat energy. The radiant coefficient of the complete appliance (radiant output in relation to heat input, corrected dry value) will not be less than 0..63 (63% radiant heat output) as tested and certified by CSA International according to ANSI Z83.19A-2002 ~ CSA 2.35A - 2002 B (formerly ANSI 83.6) or European Standard EN 419-2 (Standard test methodology). The convection heat coefficient of the appliance will not be more than 37%.
3.04 Submissions - Proof of Performance The project submission will include written results of the radiant coefficient testing of the complete heater as produced by CSA International or other accredited certification test facility. If the proposed radiant heater is unable to attain the minimum 63% radiant coefficient, a proposal submission will include: Written results from a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for certification stipulating the radiant coefficient of the proposed heater The required quantity and input rating of the proposed radiant heater to attain the necessary radiant heat to the floor to satisfy the heating design condition of the specified radiant heating system
The hourly gas consumption rate and resultant volumes of the products of combustion C02, CO and NOx of the proposed radiant heater to enable comparison to the specified radiant heater
Part 4 — Accessories / Ancillaries
4.01 Temperature Control: Space Heating
A. GENERAL Infrared Setback Thermostat will sense both infrared radiant temperature and ambient HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INFRARED HEATERS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 02-4 temperature to realize accurate comfort control. The setback feature will automatically reduce the set operating temperature by 9F° (5C°) when area lighting level is reduced due to an unoccupied condition.
a. The thermostat will be comprised of a metal dome that will attach to a mounting plate using two metal screws. All control circuitry and comfort temperature selection controls will be mounted inside of the metal dome enclosure to protect the circuitry and provide resistance to tampering with temperature settings. i. Optionally tamper proof screws for mounting of the metal dome to the mounting plate will limit access to thermostat settings to authorized personnel with access to the special tool required to manipulate the screws b. The thermostat will sense both infrared and ambient temperature and average the two to maintain the comfort temperature setting within the heat zone c. The thermostat will incorporate automatic temperature setback of 9F° (5C°) during an unoccupied condition. A photoconductive cell will be used to sense occupancy within the heater zone by sensing illumination. Resumption of the occupied state illumination level will return thermostat temperature control to full comfort setting. A switching mechanism will allow calibration of the photoconductive cell to the base illumination level for occupied status. A switching mechanism within the thermostat will allow for disabling of the temperature setback feature. d. The thermostat mounting plate will attach to a standard 4” x 4” octagonal electrical box. e. Electrical rating: 24 Vac
4.02 Heater Control: Arena Spectator Heating Application
A. GENERAL An Arena Control Panel will activate interlocked mechanical exhaust, provide individual On/Off control for each heater and will include a master timer so that the operator can select a predetermined time period after which power to the interlocked exhaust and all heaters will shut off.
MODELS:
ACPT-8 up to 8 Heaters Part #: JM-0408-XX
ACPT-12 up to 12 Heaters Part #: JM-0412-XX
ACPT-16 up to 16 Heaters Part #: JM-0416-XX
a. ELECTRICAL: The Arena Control Panel will provide 24 Vac power to a 24V/120V relay switch to activate any mechanical exhaust interlocked to the heaters. For each heater or zone of heaters the installer will provide a 120V/24V/60HZ transformer with a capacity of 40VA for the first heater plus 20VA for each additional heater in the zone.
4.02 Other Heater Ancillaries
A. Gas Connection Each heater will be connected to the gas supply piping using a CSA International certified ½” x 18” stainless steel flexible gas connector (JL-0771-FF) as supplied by the manufacturer of the heater.
B. Venturi Cover: Draft Protection When located in an area with a high rate of air infiltration such as close proximity to an overhead HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INFRARED HEATERS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 02-5 door, the heater will be fitted with Pressure Equalizer Venturi Cover JO-0366-XX to protect and stabilize the introduction of the gas/air fuel mixture to the heater.
C. Tile Protection Grille When located in an area where site conditions or practices could result in foreign objects coming into contact with the ceramic tile burner the heater will be fitted with a 1” x 1” rigid protection screen as supplied by the manufacturer of the heater.
D. Reflector Extension To prevent impingement of infrared heat on nearby surface(s) the heater will be fitted with a reflector extension as supplied by the manufacturer of the heater. The reflector extension will be installed on the heater(s) as per the manufacturer’s instruction and as indicated on the drawings.
E. Clearance Reduction Above the Heater To reduce the clearance to combustibles above the heater a ceiling protection plate as supplied by the manufacturer will be installed above the heater as per the manufacturer’s instruction and as indicated on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
HANGAR 40 REHAB. PHASE-1 INFRARED HEATERS iA PROJECT NO. 1625 23 34 02-6 SECTION 22 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
1.1.1 The scope of the plumbing phase of this project shall include all labor, materials, equipment, etc., required to fulfill the intent of the Contract Documents and shall include the work specified under the subsequent sections of Division 22 of these specifications.
1.1.2 Plumbing: All plumbing lines, valves, pumps, tanks, equipment, accessories, and other miscellaneous items shall be provided for a complete and working plumbing system. The plumbing system shall incorporate conveniences for maintenance and future remodeling by valving small groups of fixtures and locating soil and vent stacks at interior columns.
A. The Plumbing system shall comply with all state and local building and mechanical codes and local ordinances used by the authority having jurisdiction.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
All applicable provisions of Divisions 0 and 1 govern work under this Division. Refer to these articles in the specifications for additional information.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
1.3.1 All work shall be performed in full accord with the latest editions of the applicable state, and national building codes and local ordinances.
1.3.2 Refer to each section for applicable codes and reference standards.
1.4 FEES, PERMITS AND TAXES:
This Contractor shall make arrangements for and pay for all inspection fees, connection fees and permits required by local authorities. The Contractor shall also pay all taxes levied for labor and materials associated with work under this Division.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
1.5.1 The symbol "" indicates a requirement for submittals.
1.5.2 Refer to Architectural specifications for additional information on submittals.
1.5.3 Refer to AIA General Conditions.
1.5.4 In addition to the requirements of the above referenced portions of this specification, all Subcontractors proposing to do work under this Division shall comply with the following additional requirements:
A. These specifications and drawings are intended to indicate a standard of quality for materials and equipment which is established by the listing of manufacturer's names and catalog numbers and/or by referenced standards. Materials and equipment that do not comply with these standards of quality will not be considered for substitution.
B. As soon as practicable and within thirty (30) days after the award of the contract and before beginning the fabrication of any material or the installation of any equipment, data shall be submitted for approval on equipment and materials where noted. Materials (pipe, fittings, etc.) may be listed with the name of the manufacturer and identifying catalogue numbers. Data for equipment shall include manufacturer's name, catalog data, diagrams, drawings and other descriptive data as required or requested by the Architect for evaluation.
C. Notwithstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalogue number, such references shall be interpreted as
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 1
establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.
D. All data shall be carefully examined and shall be forwarded for approval with a signed certification to the effect that the data has been carefully checked and found to be correct with respect to dimensions and available space and that the equipment complies with all requirements of the specifications.
E. Point out in writing all deviations between the plans and specifications and the materials submitted.
F. It is understood that proof of equality is the responsibility of the Contractor and/or supplier and that it is not the responsibility of the Architect to prove the inequality of the proposed substitutions. Furthermore the decisions of the Architect are final.
1.5.5 While it is not the intention of the Architect to discriminate against any manufacturer of equipment which is equal to specified equipment, a strict interpretation of such equality will be exercised by the Architect in considering any equipment offered as a substitute for equipment named in the specification. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to submit with each request for approval of substitute material or equipment, sufficient data to show conclusively that it is equal to the material or equipment specified.
1.5.6 Each Contractor shall submit shop drawings and/or diagrams for approval and for job coordination in all cases where significant deviations from the contract drawings are contemplated because of job conditions, interferences, or substitutions of equipment, or when requested by the Architect for purposes of clarification of the Contractor's intent. He shall also submit detailed shop drawings, rough-in sheets, etc., for all special or custom built items of equipment.
1.5.7 Submittal of shop drawings shall be made in sufficient quantities to provide one (1) copy of all data to be retained by the Engineer; two (2) copies of all data to be accumulated for the Owner; one (1) copy of all data to be retained by the Contractor; one (1) copy of all data to be retained by the Architect.
1.5.8 Should any substitute items be submitted and disapproved, then those items must be furnished exactly as described herein.
1.5.9 The Architect's review of shop drawings and/or submittal data shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the contract drawings or specifications.
1.5.10 The size of plumbing equipment shown on the drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Shop drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement.
1.5.11 Prior to ordering any equipment, the contractor shall furnish to the electrical contractor an itemized list of all equipment, motors, actuators, etc. requiring electrical power. The list shall include the item and its location, voltage, phase, horsepower and amperage. A copy of the list shall be submitted to the architect.
1.6 PRIOR APPROVAL:
Where the contractor wishes to substitute equipment or materials under an "or equal" clause, he shall submit to the Architect in writing seven (7) work days prior to bid opening lists of proposed substitutions which, from published manufacturer's data, cover the salient features of the proposed substitution. Contractor shall indicate in writing all differences between specified equipment or materials and proposed substitution. Approvals will be issued in writing by addendum.
1.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS:
1.7.1 The symbol "
1.7.2 The Owner's operating personnel shall be instructed by the Contractor on how to start and operate each item of equipment. Safety features shall be pointed out, particularly the possible troubles which might cause the safety controls to operate and what might be done to remedy the trouble.
1.7.3 Provide (4) four copies of operating and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall be bound in large ring, loose-leaf binders and contain the following:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 2
A. Manufacturer's instructions and/or installation manual.
B. Manufacturer's service manual.
C. Manufacturer's lubrication chart listing types of lubricant to be used on each item of equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.
D. Electrical diagrams of each equipment "packaged" control system.
E. Parts lists and identifying part numbers with prices of each part. The name and address of the nearest distributor from which parts can be obtained.
1.8 WARRANTY:
This contractor shall warrant all workmanship, material, equipment systems, etc., provided by him for a period of one year after substantial completion of the project. This warranty means that this contractor shall make good to the Owner, at no cost, any defects that become apparent during the year following substantial completion. This warranty is in addition to any other guarantees or warranties and is not intended to limit such other guarantees or warranties.
1.9 DEFINITIONS: The following words and phrases as used herein are hereby defined:
1.9.1 "provide": Furnish and install all material and labor required for a complete installation ready for operation in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents.
1.9.2 "as required": Indicates that the Contractor shall perform the work or provide the material as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions; and in accordance with applicable codes or regulations; and in a workmanlike manner as defined by good local practice.
1.9.3 "or equal": Indicates that the Contractor may substitute equipment by another manufacturer if the salient features of the equipment indicated by manufacturer's name and/or described are, in the judgment of the Architect, adequate. Submittals for approval are required where indicated.
1.9.4 "contractor": Where the word(s) "Contractor" or "this Contractor" is/are used, they refer to the Contractor engaged to execute the work under this division of the specifications only, even though he may be technically described as a sub- contractor.
1.9.5 "intent of the Contract Documents": The specific intent of these documents is to provide to the Owner, in a thoroughly functional condition, all the various systems, equipment, etc., indicated herein. Final authority over interpretation of the "intent" shall rest with the Architect.
1.9.6 "shall": Indicates a mandatory requirement.
1.10 INSPECTION OF THE SITE:
1.10.1 The drawings are prepared from the best information available and reflect all conditions commensurate with this information. However, the contractor should visit the site prior to submitting a proposal and should verify the locations, sizes, depths, pressures, etc., of all existing utilities and familiarize himself with working conditions, hazards, existing grades, soil conditions, obstructions, etc. If it becomes evident that existing site conditions will impair the proper operation of the utilities, the Architect should be notified in writing.
1.10.2 All proposals shall take these existing conditions and any revisions required into consideration.
1.11 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:
1.11.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstructions and to conform to the details of the installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed. Furnish all necessary pilot lines and control lines whether indicated on the drawings or not. The drawings do not give exact details as to elevations of pipe lines nor do they show exact locations of pipe to scale. Piping elevations shall be handled by giving precedence to pipes which require a stated grade for proper operation. Devices necessary for installation and support of pipes, and equipment (such as sleeves, inserts, etc.) shall be located and installed as the construction progresses in order to allow completion of each phase of the work in the proper sequence.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 3
1.11.2 Drawings showing the extent and arrangement of the work of a particular trade shall be used together with drawings showing extent and arrangement of work of other trades to insure that the Contractor in laying out and installing his work shall do so in a manner such that the work of the several trades may progress in the most direct, workmanlike and harmonious manner.
1.11.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work, and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. The drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the various systems, but if any departures from these drawings are deemed necessary by the contractor, detailed drawings and descriptions of these departures and a statement of the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Architect as soon as practicable. No departures from the arrangements shown on the drawings shall be made without prior written approval of Architect.
1.11.4 In general, piping in finished areas of the building shall be run concealed unless noted and directed otherwise. Should any conditions arise which would cause any piping to be exposed in finished areas, it shall be immediately called to the Architect's attention. In unfinished spaces such as equipment rooms, all pipe shall be run as high as possible, shall be run to a continuous grade and shall be grouped wherever it is feasible to do so.
1.11.5 All pipe, etc., shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. All pipes run exposed in machinery and equipment rooms shall be installed parallel to the building planes except that the lines shall be sloped to obtain the proper pitch. Piping run above furred ceilings, etc., shall be similarly installed, except as otherwise shown. All pipe openings shall be kept closed during construction until the systems are closed with final connections.
1.11.6 The construction details of the building are illustrated on the Architectural and Structural Drawings. The trades shall thoroughly acquaint themselves with the details before submitting their bid as no allowance will be made because of unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts to accommodate the ultimate installation of pipe hangers in the forms before concrete is poured and set sleeves in forms before construction. For existing construction, all required inserts shall be "drilled-in" and all openings required through concrete or masonry shall be "saw-cut" or "core drilled" with tools specifically designed for this purpose. Explosive or compression driven inserts shall only be allowed for use as approved by SMACNA and the manufacturer of these devices. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the job to precede the general construction.
1.11.7 The plumbing plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building and in cooperation with other trades. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or directed by the Owner shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.
1.11.8 All oiling devices and all parts of equipment requiring adjustment shall be easily accessible. Equipment shall be so located and installed as to permit convenient and safe maintenance and future replacement. The trade furnishing the equipment shall be responsible prior to ordering same in the event that equipment specified and/or approved is incompatible with this requirement.
1.12 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS:
1.12.1 Refer to AIA General Conditions.
1.12.2 Each and every pipe regardless of material, which passes through a concrete slab, (except slab on grade), masonry wall, roof or other portion of the building structure shall be free from the structure and shall pass through a sleeve furnished and installed by the Subcontractor responsible for the work involved.
1.12.3 Above grade and dry location sleeves shall be constructed from 20 to 22 gauge galvanized steel and shall be flush on both sides of wall surface penetrated. The sleeves shall be sized to allow free passage of the pipe to be inserted, and when this pipe is to be insulated, the sleeves shall be large enough to pass the insulation. Floor sleeves located in pipe chases shall extend up two inches (2") above the floor slab.
1.12.4 Sleeves passing through walls or floors on or below grade and/or in moist areas shall be constructed of galvanized steel, schedule 40 pipe and shall be designed with suitable flange in the center of the floor or wall to form a waterproof passage. After the pipes have been installed in the sleeves, void space around the pipe shall be caulked to insure a waterproof penetration. Fire ratings of rated walls and floors shall be maintained by the use of approved materials.
1.12.5 All penetrations through fire rated ceilings, walls or floors shall be fire stopped using approved materials to maintain the fire rating of the ceiling, wall or floor structure. Fire stop shall be equal to BIO Fireshield, Inc., BIOTHERM
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 4
200 or BIO K-2 mortar as applicable. Penetrations shall meet or exceed the requirements set forth in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory, Volumes I and II.
1.12.6 After installation of pipe through sleeves, all sleeves shall be sealed with materials suitable for maintaining thermal resistance, acoustic properties, and weatherproofing of walls, roofs, etc. Refer to Architectural specifications.
1.13 ISOLATION:
Transmission of perceptible vibration, structure-borne noise, or objectional air borne noise to occupied areas by equipment installed under this contract will not be permitted.
1.14 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY:
This contractor assumes all responsibility regarding the safety of his personnel on the project during construction. The Contract Documents do not include materials, procedures, components, etc., required to insure construction safety. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions for additional information.
1.15 DAMAGE:
1.15.1 This Contractor shall be responsible for damage to project caused by this Contractor's failure to recognize hazards associated with items such as leaks, scheduling of work, inexperienced workmen, excessive cutting, etc.
1.15.2 This Contractor shall repair, at no expense to the Owner, any such damage.
1.15.3 This contractor shall familiarize himself with working conditions to the extent that he shall be responsible for damage to concealed piping, wiring and other equipment to remain and shall repair any damage caused by his negligence at no cost to the Owner.
1.16 FLOOR, CEILING AND WALL PLATES:
1.16.1 Refer to AIA General Conditions.
1.16.2 In addition to the requirements of the above referenced portions of this specification, all Subcontractors shall furnish a chromium plated sectional escutcheon in each finished space on each pipe or hanger rod penetrating a wall, floor or ceiling. Escutcheons shall be sized to fit snugly to all lines and where the lines are insulated, the escutcheons shall be fit snugly over the insulation. These plates shall be provided with set screws so that they fit snugly against the finished surface. All equipment rooms are classified as finished space.
1.17 EQUIPMENT NAME PLATE:
Each piece of equipment shall have a metal nameplate engraved with the manufacturer's name, the equipment's model number, and the equipment's serial number. The metal nameplate shall also be engraved with the equipment's capacity, voltage, horsepower, manufactured date and the equipment designation (i.e. WH-1, HWC-1, etc.) corresponding with the plans. This metal nameplate shall be fastened to the equipment with pop rivets. Plastic or stick-on type labels will not be acceptable.
1.18 IDENTIFICATION:
1.18.1 Each piece of equipment; every valve whose service and/or duty is not readily apparent; every piping system except cast iron sewer lines, shall be permanently and clearly identified.
1.18.2 Equipment, valves and duct shall be provided with laminated phenolic nameplates, appropriately engraved with proper identification correlated to the designation shown on the drawings. Punched plastic tape will not be acceptable. Insulated equipment may have identification taped on as for piping system.
1.18.3 Piping systems shall have designation on ten foot (10'-0") centers and closer where required to provide adequate identification, using Brady "all temperature permacode" pipe markers with direction of flow and service indication.
1.18.4 All these pipe markers shall conform to ANSI-A-13 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems". Arrow markers must have the same ANSI background colors as their companion pipe markers. All marks shall be as manufactured by Brady or approved equal.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 5
1.19 SAFETY GUARDS:
Contractor shall furnish and install all safety guards required. All belt driven equipment, projecting shafts and other rotating parts shall be enclosed or adequately guarded.
1.20 STORAGE OF MATERIALS:
Each contractor shall provide space for storage of materials, equipment or tools at ground level. Any storage contemplated within the building will be allowed only upon specific approval of the Architect.
1.21 LOCAL CUSTOMS:
Each Sub-contractor shall comply with local customs as to which particular trade shall install any part or parts of any work or equipment specified herein.
1.22 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTIONS:
The manufacturers' published directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping and wiring of all equipment and material. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the contract documents and the manufacturers' directions and shall obtain the Architect's instructions before proceeding with the work. Any such work performed that does not comply with the manufacturers' directions shall have deficiencies corrected at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
All materials shall be new and free from defects at the time of installation. Materials or equipment damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged prior to installation shall not be repaired at the job site, but shall be replaced with new materials.
2.2 MANUFACTURER’S REQUIREMENTS:
When a manufacturer's name appears in these specifications, it is not to be construed that the manufacturer does not have to meet the full requirements of the specifications or that his standard cataloged item will be acceptable.
2.3 SERVICE AND REPAIR PARTS:
All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts.
2.4 FLAME SPREAD PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS:
All materials and adhesives used for air conditioning filters, acoustical lining, and insulation shall conform to NFPA and UL life, safety and flame spread properties of materials. The composite classifications shall not exceed 25 for a flame spread rating and 50 for a smoke developed rating for these classifications as listed for the basic materials. The finishes, adhesives, etc., specified for each system and shall be such when completely assembled.
2.5 ACCESS PANELS:
Provide flush mounted metal access panels and frames with concealed hinges and key actuated locks for all concealed and otherwise inaccessible valves, parts, fittings, equipment, filters, etc. and as required for inspection or service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP:
3.1.1 All work shall be done by experienced craftsmen skilled in the applicable trade.
3.1.2 Unprofessional and incomplete work shall be rejected and corrected at no additional expense.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 6
3.2 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT:
The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of stored materials and installed equipment. Fixtures and equipment, whether located inside or outside, shall be tightly covered with sheet polyethylene or waterproof tarpaulin as protection against dirt, rust, moisture and abuse from other trades. Adequate air circulation shall be provided under any protective sheet to prevent condensate build up. Materials and equipment shall not be stored directly on the ground. Piping and equipment shall not be used by other trades as supports for scaffolds or personnel. At the completion of the work, equipment, fixtures, exposed supports and piping shall be cleaned of loose dirt, construction debris, overspray, etc., to the satisfaction of the Architect. Repairs made necessary by damage shall be paid for by the Contractor.
3.3 PROTECTION OF STRUCTURE:
Each Contractor in performing his work shall take particular care not to damage the structure. All finished floors and step treads shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building. In addition, each Contractor shall protect any materials on the job site whether a part of this contract or the property of another Contractor.
3.4 LARGE EQUIPMENT:
All large pieces of equipment which will be installed in the building, and which are too large to permit access through doorways, stairways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor and placed in the spaces before the enclosing structure is closed in.
3.5 FOUNDATIONS:
3.5.1 Concrete foundations required by mechanical equipment shall be constructed by this Contractor. See Concrete Work.
3.5.2 Equipment shall be set in place on the bases, leveled and aligned by means of shims, piped, then grouted in, in that order. After grouting, the forms shall be removed and the surfaces of the foundation shall be hand-rubbed with carborundum. Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of General Specifications, Concrete Work, of this specification.
3.6 CONFLICTS, INTERFERENCES AND COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES:
3.6.1 The drawings are not to be construed as shop drawings, but indicate the extent, general location, arrangement, etc., of piping systems and equipment. This Contractor shall refer to other sections of the specifications and other drawings such as electrical, structural, architectural, etc., in order to eliminate conflicts and undue delays in the progress of the work. Where other Contractors furnish items requiring piping connections by this Contractor, they will be held responsible for providing roughing-in drawings and assistance upon request.
3.6.2 Each trade shall so harmonize its work with that of the other trades so that the work may be done in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering the other trades. Piping interference shall be handled by giving precedence to pipe lines which require a stated grade for proper operation. Where space requirements conflict, the following order of precedence shall be observed:
A. Building lines
B. Structural members
C. Soil and drain piping
D. Vent piping
E. Refrigerant piping
F. Condensate piping
G. Supply ductwork
H. Exhaust ductwork
I. Domestic water
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 7
J. Electrical conduit
K. Natural gas piping
L. Fireline and sprinkler piping
3.6.3 In the event of conflicts between specifications and drawings, drawings shall take precedence over specifications except in matters pertaining to quality, applications, and coordination between trades, which shall be governed by specifications.
3.6.4 Plans, specifications and other documents have been prepared and developed with reasonable professional care and coordination. It is the intent that all documents are supportive and complimentary, one to the other; and as such what is required by one shall be considered as required and binding as if indicated by all. Work indicated shall include, regardless of whether or not specifically indicated, such supportive or required items or work is consistent with what is indicated, is reasonably inferable from what is indicated, and/or is common construction procedure or knowledge with regard to what is indicated.
3.6.5 In the event of conflict between codes, as interpreted by the authority having jurisdiction and the contract documents, the codes shall govern.
3.6.6 In the event of conflict between manufacturer's installation instructions and the drawings, the manufacturer's installation instructions shall govern.
3.6.7 Should discrepancies be found between the documents and/or an interpretation is required, and a decision or interpretation to the contractor is not rendered by the Architect, it shall be assumed the contractor has reviewed all the documents to find the most costly method for items in question which then shall be required. One document does not take precedence over another when interpreting a discrepancy.
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
3.7.1 All cutting required by the installation of sleeves, piping, equipment, etc., shall be coordinated with the General Contractor, but performed by this Contractor. Patching shall be by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall not cut any structural element or any finished work without permission from the Architect.
3.7.2 This Contractor shall cut and patch all paving as required by the installation of buried piping, including utilities.
3.8 CONCRETE WORK:
This Contractor shall provide all forming, reinforcing and concrete as indicated such as equipment bases, plumbing stack support, valve and cleanout pads, grease interceptors, catch basin and headwalls. Work shall conform to applicable portion of specification for CONCRETE.
3.9 PAINTING:
3.9.1 All painting except "touch-up", mechanical room piping, gas piping, and prime painting for ferrous piping shall be provided under the painting sections unless noted otherwise. All exposed piping, equipment, etc., shall be left clean and free from rust or grease and ready for the painter.
3.9.2 Where equipment finishes are damaged, this Contractor shall obtain matching color touch-up paint from the equipment's manufacturer and paint as required.
3.10 LUBRICATION:
This Contractor shall provide all lubricants for the operation of all equipment until acceptance. The Contractor shall be required to protect all bearings during the installation and shall thoroughly grease steel shafts to prevent corrosion. All motors and other equipment shall be provided with covers as required for proper protection during construction. All equipment bearings requiring periodic lubrication shall be provided with proper fittings for this purpose. Where equipment requiring such lubrication is not readily accessible due to location, copper tubing extensions shall be provided in addition to lubrication fittings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 8
3.11 ELECTRICAL WORK:
3.11.1 Except for such items that are completely wired at their point of manufacture and so delivered and unless specifically noted to the contrary herein, the Electrical Contractor shall provide all electric wiring (120 VAC and above) for power supply. This includes mounting of all electrical devices furnished under this section of these specifications.
3.11.2 Conduit and wiring (below 120 VAC) for all automatic controls, and interlock shall be provided by this Contractor. The furnishing of all disconnect switches as required for proper operation as shown on the drawings and required by code will be under Electrical Work, except where specifically designated on the plans. The furnishing of all starters for plumbing equipment will be done under this section (Plumbingl) of these specifications, unless specifically scheduled otherwise on a starter schedule on the drawings.
3.11.3 Furnishing of complete wiring diagrams showing power wiring and interlock wiring shall be work under the trade supplying the equipment. Diagrams shall be based on approved equipment and shall be complete integral drawings, not a series of manufacturer's individual diagrams. After these diagrams have been approved by the Architect/Engineer, copies shall be furnished to the trades involved and they shall be followed in detail.
3.11.4 The electrical design and drawings are based on the equipment scheduled and shown on the drawings and should any mechanical equipment requiring changes to the electrical design be approved, the required electrical changes shall be made at the expense of the trade furnishing the changed equipment and at no cost to the Owner.
3.12 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION:
This Contractor shall bring required services to equipment items furnished under other sections of this specification or by the Owner, make final connections, and leave equipment ready for operation. Where it is necessary for Contractors performing work covered by this section to make final connections to items of equipment being furnished by Contractors under other sections, all such work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner and all materials shall be of quality and finish normally used for such installation.
3.13 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION:
When any piece of mechanical or electrical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so providing that he properly cleans the equipment, installs clean filter media, properly adjusts and completes all punch list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and the start of the warranty may not be the same date.
3.14 EQUIPMENT AND AIR INTAKE ARRANGEMENTS:
3.14.1 All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces requiring access. All valves, motors, drives, lubrication devices, filters and other necessary items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part.
3.14.2 Flues, plumbing vent stacks, etc shall be separated from outside air, ventilation and combustion air intakes, to avoid infiltration of odors, fumes and other contaminants. Separation shall be 15 ft. minimum.
3.15 ROUGHING AND INSTALLATION:
A. Due to the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the work, equipment locations, etc. as part of the contract to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevation at work site.
B. Coordinate work with other trades and determine route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation.
C. Provide material with flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear the UL label.
D. Conceal all work above ceilings, in walls, below slabs and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible, notify Landmark before starting work, and install only after review.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 9
E. Chases; assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of openings and chases. Provide firestopping for openings in fire and smoke rated walls, roof and floor assemblies.
F. Supports; provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, and other items to properly support the work.
3.16 EXECUTION OF WORK:
The Contractor shall plan, schedule and execute his work and that of any of his Sub-contractors so as not to interfere with the work of other trades or Contractors in the building or on the premises.
3.17 FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING:
All building penetrations to outside shall be flashed and counter flashed as required to eliminate leaks.
3.18 TESTS:
All tests shall be made by this Contractor and repeated until approved by the Architect. Piping systems shall not be covered or otherwise concealed until tests have been made and approvals obtained. Notify the Architect four days prior to tests to allow for scheduling. Test the piping systems as indicated in applicable articles.
3.19 CLEAN-UP:
3.19.1 It shall be the responsibility of each trade to cooperate fully with the other trades on the job to help keep the job site in a clean and safe condition. At the end of each day's work, each trade shall properly store all of his tools, equipment, any surplus materials and all debris caused by his portion of the work.
3.19.2 When all work has been finally tested, the Contractor shall clean all work installed by him, including all fixtures, equipment, pipes, and all exposed work. All pipes shall be flushed out and left free of all obstructions. All plates, fixtures, and other finished products shall be thoroughly cleaned and polished.
3.20 FINAL OBSERVATIONS:
3.20.1 It shall be the duty of the Contractor to make a careful inspection trip of the entire project, assuring himself that the work on the project is ready for final acceptance, before calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a final observation.
3.20.2 In order not to delay final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall have all necessary bonds, guarantees, receipts, affidavits, etc., called for in the various articles of this specification, prepared and signed in advance, and together with a letter of transmittal listing each paper included, and shall deliver the same to the Architect/Engineer at or before the time of the final observations. The Contractor is cautioned to check over each bond, receipt, etc., before preparing same for submission to see that the items check with the requirements of the specification.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 10
SECTION 22 05 03
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
Work in this section shall include piping, fittings, accessories etc., to be used in piping systems in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents and shall include the following principal items:
Piping Valves Piping Accessories
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS:
National Bureau of Standards (NBS). Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI). American Society of Testing & Materials (ASTM). American Water Works Association (AWWA). National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM). American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
Submittals are required as indicated only. Submittal of pipe and fittings is not required unless a deviation from the specification is proposed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DRAIN AND RELIEF PIPING:
2.1.1 Auxiliary drain piping, equipment drains, appliance drain piping and water heater relief piping shall be type "L" hard drawn copper piping with cast and/or wrought copper fittings per ASTM B-88, 95/5 solder. Provide pipe supports at specified intervals with only copper-plated, copper or brass in contact with copper piping.
2.1.2 All drain piping shall be installed with a minimum fall of 1/8" per foot unless noted otherwise on plan.
2.2 NATURAL GAS PIPING:
2.2.1 Furnish and install a system of gas piping as shown on the plans. All gas piping within the building shall be run exposed unless specifically shown otherwise. Any gas piping concealed within the building shall be properly vented to the outside.
2.2.2 Gas cocks 2" and smaller; shall be threaded Jenkins, NIBCO, Powell or Stockham, 150 psi with bronze body, straight pattern and square head. 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged MSS SP-78, 175 psi, plug type with semi-steel body.
2.2.3 Gas Piping; shall be ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B, seamless black steel.
2.2.4 Fittings; shall be malleable iron threaded, ANSI B 16.3, Class 150 or seamless steel welded fittings, ASTM A 53, ANSI B 16.9 and B 16.11.
2.2.5 Gas pressure regulators; as required for heating water boiler, shall be single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion resistant and atmospheric vented to the outside; 2" and smaller shall be threaded, 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged.
2.2.6 All underground piping shall have factory applied covering conforming to Republic "X-Tru-Coat"; or General Paint Corporation Specification "TMA-2", and shall include the following layers (one coat Biturine Enamel, one wrapping of felt and a final wrapping of heavy kraft paper.) Fittings and joints shall be treated and wrapped as specified above, in field after lines have been tested.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 03 - 1
2.2.7 Care shall be taken to keep the inside of piping dry and free of dirt, cutting burrs and other foreign substances. All threaded piping shall be reamed smooth after cutting and shall be threaded with true, sharp dies to insure a proper joint make-up.
2.2.8 All equipment connection shall be preceded by a manual stop cock or ball valve, union and 12" drip leg.
2.2.9 Unions 2-1/2" and smaller shall be Grinnell 463, or equal, black malleable iron, ground joint, brass to iron seat unions. Unions 3" and larger shall be Crane Company Standard malleable iron gasket type flange unions with proper gasket.
2.2.10 All exposed gas piping whether interior or exterior to the building shall be painted with one coat of primer and two coats of black rust preventative paint. Primer and first coat of paint shall not be the same color. Piping exposed on the building exterior shall be painted with a coat to match the building finish.
2.2.11 Provide 17 pound magnesium anodes by Standard Magnesium Corporation, located as indicated in an augured hole five feet from the pipe. The electrode wire shall be brazed or thermite welded to the pipe and coated with mastic.
2.2.12 Provide a dielectric union at each location where the piping enters the building to electrically isolate the gas utility distribution system.
2.2.13 A DC voltage reading shall be made to test the effectiveness of the isolating unions. A minimum reading of 0.2 volts (measured across the union) shall be required. Repair or replace unions until this voltage can be obtained.
2.2.14 Provide anodeless riser at building and meter for transition from polyethylene plastic pipe to above ground piping. Metal pipe to have factory conforming to Republic “X-TRU-COAT”.
2.2.15 Provide a lubricated plug cock and union in the inlet and discharge piping of each gas pressure regulator. Extend schedule 40 threaded galvanized steel pipe vents from each interior regulator and terminate through the roof with watertight flashing, gooseneck and birdscreen. Vents shall be the full size of the regulator vent connection and shall extend through the roof undiminished in size.
2.3 PIPING ACCESSORIES GENERAL:
2.3.1 Flanges shall be slip-on or butt welding standard weight 1/16" raised face type with gaskets.
2.3.2 Unions shall be all bronze for copper systems and malleable iron with ground joint for steel piping systems. Provide dielectric unions for joining dissimilar metallic piping systems.
2.3.3 Weldolets and threadolets shall be steel per ANSI B16.9.
2.3.4 Escutcheons shall be single piece, set screw type, chrome plated and shall cover the opening and sleeve.
2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. Conform to ASME, ASTM and MSS SP requirements. B. Hangers for pipe sizes ½ to 1-1/2 inches: carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. C. Hangers for cold pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger: carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. D. Hangers for hot pipe sizes 2 to 4 inches: carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. E. Hangers for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and larger: adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. F. Multiple or trapeze hangers: steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. G. Multiple or trapeze hangers for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and larger: steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. H. Wall support for pipe sizes 3 inches and smaller: cast iron hooks. I. Wall support for pipe sizes 4 inches and larger: welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. J. Wall Support for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and larger: welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. K. Vertical support: steel riser clamp. L. Floor support for cold pipe: cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. M. Floor support for hot pipe 4 inches and smaller: cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. N. Floor support for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and larger: adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 03 - 2
O. Copper pipe support: carbon steel rings, adjustable, copper plated. P. Hanger rods: mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on end, or continuous threaded. Q. Inserts: malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.5 VALVES:
A. Water Supply Pipe Valves: The manufacturer's name and valve number shall be cast into the body of the valve. Each valve shall be tagged and numbered corresponding with a valve schedule which shall provide the location, purpose, type, service, pressure, class, manufacturer, and figure number. One of the following approved manufacturer’s may be used:
a. Bell & Gossett (B&G) b. Hammond c. ITT Grinnell d. Milwaukee e. NIBCO f. Watts
B. Ball Valves: For piping 2-1/2" and smaller rated for 600 psi WOG, bronze body, two-piece full-port, replaceable Teflon seats and seals, with vinyl coated steel handle to protect installation; equal to NIBCO 580-70 for piping larger than 1" and 585-70 for piping 1" and smaller.
C. Butterfly Valves: For piping 3" and larger, MSS SP-67, 200 psi, ductile iron body, nickel plated ductile iron disc, stainless steel stem, and EDPM O-ring stem seals; equal to NIBCO #LD-2010.
D. Gate Valves: Rising stem, union bonnet, brass body, for 2” and under. For piping 2 1/2” and larger, iron body, bronze trim, equal to NIBCO #F-617-0. E. Check Valves: 2-1/2" and smaller, Class 125, bronze body, in-line non-slamming lift type, Teflon seal, resilient disc., equal to NIBCO #S-480; 3" and larger, 125 lb. WOG wafer type, renewable bronze disc and seat, equal to NIBCO #W-910.
F. Balancing Valves: 3/4" and smaller shall be calibrated bronze plug valve with tapping orifice:
B&G CB-3/4 or CB-1/2, or equal Watts or Armstrong.
G. Valve Identification: Each valve shall be tagged and numbered corresponding with a valve schedule. 1. Tags shall be minimum twenty (20) gauge polished brass not less than 1-1/2” diameter with 1/4” stamped letters identifying service and 1/2” stamped letters identifying valve number. 2. Tags shall be secured with approved meter seal, brass “s” hooks or brass jack chain. 3. Valve charts shall be provided in duplicate, one (1) mounted in an aluminum frame with plexiglass secured on a wall in the main mechanical room, and the other enclosed in a transparent plastic covering with two (2) grommet reinforced holes at the top and an 8” length of nickel plated bead chain attached. 4. Charts shall include the following information: i. Valve identification number ii. Location iii. Purpose iv. Type v. Service vi. Pressure vii. Class viii. Manufacturer ix. Figure number
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION:
3.1.1 All domestic piping systems shall be installed level and the low points of all risers shall have gate valves 1/2" in size installed with hose ends in order to adequately drain the system.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 03 - 3
3.1.2 At each group of plumbing fixtures and at each piece of equipment, full-port ball valves shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor so that these groups of fixtures or pieces of equipment may be isolated from accessible locations. Provide General Contractor with locations of all access doors. Access doors required for these valves shall be furnished by this Contractor.
3.1.3 Each of the piping systems shall be installed to provide for expansion and contraction and the joints shall be soldered at such time that the system is not under strain.
3.1.4 Necessary spring pieces and offsets shall be furnished by this Contractor as required.
3.1.5 Each of the piping systems shall be concealed in chases and above ceilings and in walls in all finished areas and shall be run exposed only as specifically specified or as shown on the drawings in machinery spaces or unfinished areas.
3.1.6 Exposed piping shall be held close to the walls and ceilings and necessary fittings shall be provided and installed to allow for offsets to hold the piping close to wall and ceilings. Where these lines run exposed a clearance shall be obtained from the Architect in writing before making the installation.
3.1.7 All valves shall be so located as to make the removal of their bonnets possible. All flanged valves shown in the horizontal positions shall be mounted with valve stem inclined one bolt hole above the horizontal lines shall be "made-up" with valve stem inclined at an angle of thirty (30) degrees above the horizontal position. All valve stems must be true and straight at the time the system is tested for final acceptance.
3.1.8 Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and worked into place without springing or forcing.
3.1.9 Provide clearance for installation of insulation and for access to valves, air vents, drain and unions.
3.1.10 Slope piping as indicated and provide automatic air vent at all high points of the systems. Extend 1/4" soft copper extensions from vents to suitable drain where air vents are in inaccessible locations.
3.1.11 Provide a 1/2" thick foam plastic insulating sleeve-protector on all copper and plastic piping penetrations of concrete slab-on-grade prior to pouring of concrete.
3.1.12 Locate and suspend piping in such a manner so as to minimize transmission of vibration and noise.
3.1.13 All piping penetrations through fire rated ceilings, walls or floors shall be fire stopped using approved materials to maintain the fire rating of the ceiling, wall or floor structure. Fire stop shall be equal to BIO Fireshield, Inc., BIOTHERM 200 or BIO K-2 mortar as applicable.
3.1.14 All piping connections to equipment and fixtures shall contain flanges or unions to allow easy removal whether or not shown on the plans.
3.1.15 Install a continuous length of tracer wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic pipe installed underground. Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it will not be displaced during construction operations.
3.1.16 Air gaps for all indirect waste connections (open-sight) shall be at least twice the effective drain piping diameter and in no case less than 2".
3.2 PIPING JOINTS:
3.2.1 Screwed joints shall have full cut pipe threads. Joints shall be assembled with an approved compound applied to only the male threads. A minimum of three pipe threads shall remain exposed when the joint is assembled.
3.2.2 Welded pipe joints shall be fusion welded by a metallic arc welding process. The welding operations shall conform to the current recommendations of the American Welding Society. This Contractor's welder, employed on this project, shall have passed qualification tests as prescribed by the National Pipe Welding Bureau or other reputable testing laboratory using qualification procedures as recommended by the ASME Boiler Construction Code or American Welding Standards.
3.2.3 Mechanical coupling joints shall be assembled in strict accordance with the recommendations of the coupling joint manufacturer. The bolts, fasteners, gaskets and lubricants shall be a product of, or shall adhere rigidly to, the specification requirements of the joint manufacturer.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 03 - 4
3.2.4 Solder joints shall be assembled with square cut pipe using a pipe cutter. Hack saw cut pipe ends shall be reamed to full size. Both the pipe and fittings shall be furnished absolutely clean. Brazing flux shall be applied to both the pipe and the fittings. The use of corrosive acid flux will not be permitted. During the brazing, the pipe and fittings must be charged with nitrogen gas.
3.2.5 See Paragraph 2.2 for cast-iron piping joints.
3.3 SECURING AND SUPPORTING OF PIPE:
3.3.1 All pipe shall be supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers and supports. Piping shall be supported to maintain required grade and pitch, prevent vibration and provide for expansion/contraction.
3.3.2 All hangers shall be secured to approved inserts wherever possible and practicable. Hanger inserts shall be set in place before concrete is poured. Where hangers attach to the structural steel framing, approved beam clamps shall be employed. Where required, the Mechanical Subcontractor shall install channels to span between framing members. In no case shall spacing of hangers for horizontal piping be greater than indicated on the following schedule:
FERROUS (SCHEDULE 40) PIPING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE HANGER SPACING (MAXIMUM) 1/2" 5'-0" 3/4" 6'-0" 1" 7'-0" 1-1/2" 8'-0" 2" to 6" 10'-0" 8" and larger 12'-0"
COPPER PIPING/TUBING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE HANGER SPACING (MAXIMUM) Up to 1-1/2" 6'-0" 2" and larger 8'-0"
CAST IRON PIPING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE HANGER SPACING (MAXIMUM) All pipe sizes one hanger per length of pipe and not exceeding 5'-0" intervals
3.3.3 Vertical lines shall be adequately supported at their bases, either by a suitable hanger placed in the horizontal line near the riser, or by a base fitting set on a pedestal or foundation and from each floor slab by means of approved clamp type support bearing on the slab or beam. In no case shall the spacing of supports for vertical piping be greater than indicated on the following schedule:
FERROUS (SCHEDULE 40) PIPING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE SUPPORT SPACING (MAXIMUM) All pipe sizes At the base and at each story level, not exceeding 30'-0" intervals
PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 03 - 5
COPPER PIPING/TUBING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE SUPPORT SPACING (MAXIMUM) Up to 1-1/4" 4'-0" 1-1/2" and larger At the base and at each story level, not exceeding 15'-0" intervals
CAST IRON PIPING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE SUPPORT SPACING (MAXIMUM) All pipe sizes At the base and at each story level, not exceeding 15'-0" intervals 3.3.4 Hangers for piping 2" and smaller shall be of the split cast ring type with fastening device. Hangers for piping larger than 2" shall be of the adjustable clevis hanger type. Hanger rods shall be minimum 3/8" diameter and shall have machine threads. Brackets of approved type may be used along walls. Hanger rods for individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be steel rods of size indicated on the following table:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE (MAXIMUM) 1/2" to 2" 3/8" 2-1/2" to 3" 1/2" 4" 5/8" 5" to 6" 3/4" 8" to 12" 7/8"
3.3.5 Hangers for use with copper piping shall be copper plated ferrous sizes for copper tubing.
3.3.6 Hangers shall be installed within 2'-0" of each change in direction, either vertical or horizontal, or pipe tee and on each side of valves, strainers, etc.
3.3.7 Multiple horizontal pipes, smaller than 12" diameter pipe, may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze spacing shall be in accordance with the schedule for pipe spacing based upon the smallest pipe. The trapeze members shall be properly sized for the piping load they are to support.
3.3.8 Where "cold" pipes are insulated with a vapor sealing jacket, the hanger shall be oversized accordingly to accommodate the outside diameter of the insulation, and half-round 16 gauge galvanized steel shields, not less than 14" long, rolled to fit the insulation diameter, shall be provided between the insulation and the hanger.
3.3.9 Pipe supports shall be as manufactured by Fee and Mason, Grinnell, F&S Manufacturing, or prior-approved equal.
3.4 INSTALLATION – INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.
B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches (100 mm) and larger.
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.
3.5 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install in accordance with ASME, ASTM and MSS SP.
B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 03 - 6
C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze hangers.
H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
3.6 EQUIPMENT PLUMBING CONNECTIONS:
3.6.1 The Plumbing Subcontractor shall rough-in for connections to all miscellaneous equipment noted on the drawings. Final connections to the equipment shall be a part of this contract.
3.6.2 The Plumbing Subcontractor shall make final connections to all pieces of equipment furnished under this (general) contract that require natural gas, water, drain, waste or vent connections, furnishing all required shutoff cocks, valves, drain valves and traps unless specified or noted otherwise on plan.
3.6.3 System shall be capable of passing all Local Plumbing Code tests for conventional pipe and fittings.
3.7 GAS PIPING TESTING AND INSTALLATION:
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
B. Pitch horizontal piping down 1" in 60 feet in the direction of flow. Install a 4" minimum depth dirt leg at the bottom of each vertical run and at each appliance. When installing mains and branches, cap gas tight each tee or pipe end which will not be immediately extended. All branch connections to the main shall be from the top or side of the main.
C. Do not install gas pipe below a building or its foundation or in a ventilation air plenum.
D. If an above ground vent terminates in an area subject to snow accumulation, terminate the line at least five feet above grade.
E. Install a shut off valve at each appliance. Provide a valve connection at the main for equipment and appliances furnished by others.
F. Provide hangers and supports in accordance with building code and gas utility company requirements.
G. Piping through a roof shall be run through an approved roof penetration with flashing and counter flashing.
H. Each gas pressure reducing valve vent and relief valve vent shall be run separately to a point outside of the building, terminated with a screened vent cap, and located according to gas utility regulations.
I. Clean all welded piping before all regulators and control valves. Test by placing target cloth over piping and blow with compressed air. Clean piping until target cloth is clean and free of debris.
J. Gas piping installation and testing shall be tested in strict accordance with NFPA 54.
3.8 TESTING REQUIREMENTS:
Refer to sections 220900 for further testing requirements. END OF SECTION
PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 03 - 7
SECTION 22 07 00
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL:
Refer to Section 220500 for Common Work Results for Plumbing.
1.2 SCOPE:
The Contractor shall cover all piping and apparatuses, as specified below, with insulation as manufactured by Manville, Owens-Corning or equal. All insulation, jacket, facing and adhesive shall have composite ratings not exceeding flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50.
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable building code for manufacture, product, and installation of system.
B. Provide insulation material with flame spread rating per NFPA 90.1 and UL 181,
C. Provide insulation material with thermal performance and thickness per ASTM E84.
D. Composite pipe insulation including jackets, coverings, sealers and mastics shall have a flame-spread index of twenty-five (25) or less and a fuel contributed and smoke-developed index of fifty (50) or less as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 225).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class I.
B. Flexible Unicellular Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type I or Type II.
C. Rigid and Semi-rigid Fiberglass Insulation; shall be minimum nominal density of 3 pcf with a white kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier all service jackets
D. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping.
E. Insulation for pipe fittings shall be encased with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers.
F. Elastomeric Insulation; shall be flexible closed cell, minimum nominal density of 5.5 psf.
G. Fireproofing Insulation; shall be mineral fiber with nominal density of 8 pcf, lame spread index of 0, and smoke development index of 0.
2.2 RIGID PIPE INSULATION
A. Equipment insulation of double density fiberglass with integral fire retardant continuous vapor barrier jacket. One of the following equal manufacturers may be used: a. Armstrong
b. Gustin-Bacon
c. Johns-Manville
d. Owens Corning
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 1
2.3 PIPE INSULATION LOCATIONS
A. Hot Water and Hot Water Return Piping: Provide rigid fiberglass with integral all service jacket insulation for hot water supply and return piping including valves, and fittings.
B. Cold Water (Domestic and Storm): Provide rigid fiberglass insulation with integral vapor barrier jacket or elastomeric applied insulation to form a vapor barrier, white 30 mil protective PVC jacketing (required for fittings, valves, etc. only - not for standard straight sections of piping) and heavy duty PVC fittings including valves, and fittings.
2.4 ALUMINUM METAL JACKET:
All insulation outside, exposed to weather shall be covered with 0.024" aluminum metal jacket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROCEDURES:
3.1.1 All insulation shall be the product of reputable manufacturers and shall be applied by mechanics skilled in the use of various materials and in the employ of a concern regularly engaged in the insulating business. The materials shall all be applied in accordance with the published standards of the manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. Unsightly work shall be just cause for rejection.
3.1.2 All sectional covering shall finish round and smooth, without lumps or depressions and all end and joints shall butt evenly and tightly together and to the covered surface. No broken or damaged section shall be used. When covering is formed from blocks, they shall be carefully and evenly applied, securely wired in place and joints shall be closed with cement insulation.
3.1.3 In instances where insulated lines pass into other areas, wherein the line will not be insulated as described herein, the insulation shall not terminate at the wall, but shall extend full size a minimum of 1" beyond the wall.
3.1.4 Engage the services of a qualified insulation applicator to furnish and install all the insulation required for the mechanical equipment, piping, etc., specified herein.
3.1.5 All surfaces to be insulated shall be clean and dry before applying insulation. All sections of molded pipe covering shall be firmly butted together. No insulation shall be applied until the pipe, etc., have been pressure tested and found tight. Piping flexible connections, flanges and unions shall not be covered unless specifically noted.
3.1.6 Prior to the installation of any insulating material to ferrous piping systems, the piping surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mill scale, grease and dirt and shall be given a coat of rust inhibiting primer.
3.1.7 Refer to Section 22 05 00, for flame spread properties of insulating materials.
3.1.8 At all valves, unions, flanges, etc. insulation shall be beveled or tapered to the surface being insulated. Insulation ends shall then be sealed vapor-tight with mastic.
3.1.9 Where vapor barriers are required, the vapor barrier shall be on the outside. Extreme care shall be taken that the vapor barrier is unbroken. Joints, etc., shall all be sealed. Where insulation with a vapor barrier terminates, it shall be sealed off with the vapor barrier being tapered continuous to the surface being insulated. Ends shall not be left raw.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that area of Work is ready for work of this section.
B. Verify that electrical power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
B. Cold Piping Application Requirements: a. Cold domestic water piping - all horizontal and vertical piping.
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 2
b. Above-ground storm water piping and all cold condensate drain piping.
c. Roof drain bodies and sump pans.
d. Insulation shall be 1” thick minimum for all pipe sizes (required for overflow storm drain bodies and sump pans, but is not required for overflow storm drain piping).
C. Hot Piping Application Requirements:
a. All potable hot water and hot water recirculating piping.
b. Insulation shall be 1” thick minimum for all pipe sizes.
D. Integrity of vapor-barrier jackets shall be maintained and protected to prevent puncture.
E. Valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system shall be covered with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Factory molded, pre-cut or job fabricated units shall be installed.
F. Pipe insulation shall butt against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot piping, 3” wide vapor barrier tape or band shall be applied over the butt joints. For cold piping, a wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement shall be applied on butt joints and joints sealed with 3” wide vapor barrier tape or band.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 3
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 23 05 00: GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
The scope of the mechanical phase of this project shall include all labor, materials, equipment, etc., required to fulfill the intent of the Contract Documents and shall include the work specified under the subsequent sections of Division 23 of these specifications.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
All applicable provisions of Divisions 0 and 1 govern work under this Division. Refer to these articles in the specifications for additional information.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
1.3.1 All work shall be performed in full accord with the latest editions of the applicable state, and national building codes and local ordinances.
1.3.2 Refer to each section for applicable codes and reference standards.
1.4 FEES, PERMITS AND TAXES:
This Contractor shall make arrangements for and pay for all inspection fees, connection fees and permits required by local authorities. The Contractor shall also pay all taxes levied for labor and materials associated with work under this Division.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
1.5.1 The symbol "" indicates a requirement for submittals.
1.5.2 Refer to Architectural specifications for additional information on submittals.
1.5.3 Refer to AIA General Conditions.
1.5.4 In addition to the requirements of the above referenced portions of this specification, all Subcontractors proposing to do work under this Division shall comply with the following additional requirements:
A. These specifications and drawings are intended to indicate a standard of quality for materials and equipment which is established by the listing of manufacturer's names and catalog numbers and/or by referenced standards. Materials and equipment that do not comply with these standards of quality will not be considered for substitution.
B. As soon as practicable and within thirty (30) days after the award of the contract and before beginning the fabrication of any material or the installation of any equipment, data shall be submitted for approval on equipment and materials where noted. Materials (pipe, fittings, etc.) may be listed with the name of the manufacturer and identifying catalogue numbers. Data for equipment shall include manufacturer's name, catalog data, diagrams, drawings and other descriptive data as required or requested by the Architect for evaluation.
C. Notwithstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalogue number, such references shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.
D. All data shall be carefully examined and shall be forwarded for approval with a signed certification to the effect that the data has been carefully checked and found to be correct with respect to dimensions and available space and that the equipment complies with all requirements of the specifications.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-1
E. Point out in writing all deviations between the plans and specifications and the materials submitted.
F. It is understood that proof of equality is the responsibility of the Contractor and/or supplier and that it is not the responsibility of the Architect to prove the inequality of the proposed substitutions. Furthermore the decisions of the Architect are final.
1.5.5 While it is not the intention of the Architect to discriminate against any manufacturer of equipment which is equal to specified equipment, a strict interpretation of such equality will be exercised by the Architect in considering any equipment offered as a substitute for equipment named in the specification. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to submit with each request for approval of substitute material or equipment, sufficient data to show conclusively that it is equal to the material or equipment specified.
1.5.6 Each Contractor shall submit shop drawings and/or diagrams for approval and for job coordination in all cases where significant deviations from the contract drawings are contemplated because of job conditions, interferences, or substitutions of equipment, or when requested by the Architect for purposes of clarification of the Contractor's intent. The Contractor shall also submit detailed shop drawings, rough-in sheets, etc., for all special or custom built items of equipment.
1.5.7 Submittal of shop drawings shall be made in sufficient quantities to provide one (1) copy of all data to be retained by the Engineer; two (2) copies of all data to be accumulated for the Owner; one (1) copy of all data to be retained by the Contractor; one (1) copy of all data to be retained by the Architect.
1.5.8 Should any substitute items be submitted and disapproved, then those items must be furnished exactly as described herein.
1.5.9 The Architect's review of shop drawings and/or submittal data shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the contract drawings or specifications.
1.5.10 The size of mechanical equipment shown on the drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Shop drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement.
1.5.11 Prior to ordering any equipment, the contractor shall furnish to the electrical contractor an itemized list of all equipment, motors, actuators, controller, control panels, etc. requiring electrical power. The list shall include the item and it's location, voltage, phase, horsepower and amperage. A copy of the list shall be submitted to the architect.
1.5.12 One half (1/2) inch scale reproducible shop drawings shall be prepared and submitted for approval to indicate a suitable arrangement in all mechanical rooms, to include but not limited to piping, fittings and valves, equipment and accessories. All ductwork shall be drawn double-lined. All drafting shall be done by a qualified draftsperson. The engineer reserves the right to request resumes of drafting personnel or drafting service.
1.5.13 Provide 1/2 inch scale drawing for each air-handling unit to be replaced. Presenting method of support piping connections, etc.
1.6 PRIOR APPROVAL:
Where the contractor wishes to substitute equipment or materials under an "or equal" clause, he shall submit to the Architect in writing seven (7) work days prior to bid opening lists of proposed substitutions which, from published manufacturer's data, cover the salient features of the proposed substitution. Contractor shall indicate in writing all differences between specified equipment or materials and proposed substitution. Approvals will be issued in writing by addendum.
1.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS:
1.7.1 The symbol "
1.7.2 The Owner's operating personnel shall be instructed by the Contractor on how to start and operate each item of equipment. Safety features shall be pointed out, particularly the possible troubles which might cause the safety controls to operate and what might be done to remedy the trouble.
1.7.3 The Owner's operating personnel shall be thoroughly instructed in the operation of the control system. Instructions should include an explanation of the control system or system sequence of operation, the proper set points of each
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-2 thermostat, etc., and how to change the settings to accommodate overheating and overcooling, or incorrect humidity. Instructions shall include an explanation of components which should not be tampered with or control settings which should not be changed except by authorized personnel of the Control Manufacturer. Thermostat keys shall be turned over to the Owner. 1.7.4 Relative to the air conditioning system, instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the following:
A. Removal of service access panels from equipment. If special tools are required, turn over to the Owner at least one set.
B. Method of removing air filters.
C. Method of cleaning permanent type air filters.
D. How to drain and fill all piping and equipment.
E. How to vent air from the system.
F. Location of concealed valves, traps, air splitters, automatic valves and dampers, etc., requiring periodic maintenance and location of access to them.
1.7.5 Provide (4) four copies of operating and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall be bound in large ring, loose-leaf binders and contain the following:
A. Manufacturer's instructions and/or installation manual.
B. Manufacturer's service manual.
C. Manufacturer's lubrication chart listing types of lubricant to be used on each item of equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.
D. Electrical diagrams of each equipment "packaged" control system.
E. Diagrams of automatic temperature control systems, identifying each by name, location and number showing sequence of operation. Each component of a control system shall be identified. All diagrams shall be up-to-date, reflecting any on-the-job changes.
F. Parts lists and identifying part numbers with prices of each part. The name and address of the nearest distributor from which parts can be obtained.
1.8 WARRANTY:
This contractor shall warrant all workmanship, material, equipment systems, etc., provided by him for a period of one year after substantial completion of the project. This warranty means that this contractor shall make good to the Owner, at no cost, any defects that become apparent during the year following substantial completion. This warranty is in addition to any other guarantees or warranties and is not intended to limit such other guarantees or warranties.
1.9 DEFINITIONS: The following words and phrases as used herein are hereby defined:
1.9.1 "provide": Furnish and install all material and labor required for a complete installation ready for operation in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents.
1.9.2 "as required": Indicates that the Contractor shall perform the work or provide the material as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions; and in accordance with applicable codes or regulations; and in a workmanlike manner as defined by good local practice.
1.9.3 "or equal": Indicates that the Contractor may substitute equipment by another manufacturer if the salient features of the equipment indicated by manufacturer's name and/or described are, in the judgment of the Architect, adequate. Submittals for approval are required where indicated.
1.9.4 "contractor": Where the word(s) "Contractor" or "this Contractor" is/are used, they refer to the Contractor engaged to execute the work under this division of the specifications only, even though he may be technically described as a sub- contractor.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-3
1.9.5 "intent of the Contract Documents": The specific intent of these documents is to provide to the Owner, in a thoroughly functional condition, all the various systems, equipment, etc., indicated herein. Final authority over interpretation of the "intent" shall rest with the Architect.
1.9.6 "shall": Indicates a mandatory requirement.
1.10 INSPECTION OF THE SITE:
1.10.1 The drawings are prepared from the best information available and reflect all conditions commensurate with this information. However, the contractor should visit the site prior to submitting a proposal and should verify the locations, sizes, depths, pressures, etc., of all existing utilities and familiarize himself with working conditions, hazards, existing grades, soil conditions, obstructions, etc. If it becomes evident that existing site conditions will impair the proper operation of the utilities, the Architect should be notified in writing.
1.10.2 All proposals shall take these existing conditions and any revisions required into consideration.
1.11 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:
1.11.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the existing building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstructions and to conform to the details of the installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed. Furnish all necessary pilot lines and control lines whether indicated on the drawings or not. The drawings do not give exact details as to elevations of pipe lines nor do they show exact locations of pipe to scale. Piping elevations shall be handled by giving precedence to pipes which require a stated grade for proper operation. Devices necessary for installation and support of pipes, and equipment (such as sleeves, inserts, etc.) shall be located and installed as the construction progresses in order to allow completion of each phase of the work in the proper sequence.
1.11.2 Drawings showing the extent and arrangement of the work of a particular trade shall be used together with drawings showing extent and arrangement of work of other trades to insure that the Contractor in laying out and installing his work shall do so in a manner such that the work of the several trades may progress in the most direct, workmanlike and harmonious manner.
1.11.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work, and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. The drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the various systems, but if any departures from these drawings are deemed necessary by the contractor, detailed drawings and descriptions of these departures and a statement of the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Architect as soon as practicable. No departures from the arrangements shown on the drawings shall be made without prior written approval of Architect.
1.11.4 In general, piping and ductwork in finished areas of the building shall be run concealed unless noted and directed otherwise. Should any conditions arise which would cause any piping or ductwork to be exposed in finished areas, it shall be immediately called to the Architect's attention. In unfinished spaces such as equipment rooms, all pipe and duct shall be run as high as possible, shall be run to a continuous grade and shall be grouped wherever it is feasible to do so.
1.11.5 All pipe, duct, etc., shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. All ducts and pipes run exposed in machinery and equipment rooms shall be installed parallel to the building planes except that the lines shall be sloped to obtain the proper pitch. Piping and ducts run above furred ceilings, etc., shall be similarly installed, except as otherwise shown. All pipe openings shall be kept closed during construction until the systems are closed with final connections.
1.11.6 The construction details of the building are illustrated on the Architectural Drawings. The trades shall thoroughly acquaint themselves with the details before submitting their bid as no allowance will be made because of unfamiliarity with these details. For new construction, place all inserts to accommodate the ultimate installation of pipe hangers in the forms before concrete is poured and set sleeves in forms before construction. For existing construction, all required inserts shall be "drilled-in" and all openings required through concrete or masonry shall be "saw-cut" or "core drilled" with tools specifically designed for this purpose. Explosive or compression driven inserts shall only be allowed for use as approved by SMACNA and the manufacturer of these devices. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the job to precede the general construction.
1.11.7 The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the existing building constraints, general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building and in cooperation with other trades.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-4
Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or directed by the Owner shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.
1.11.8 All oiling devices and all parts of equipment requiring adjustment shall be easily accessible. Equipment shall be so located and installed as to permit convenient and safe maintenance and future replacement. The trade furnishing the equipment shall be responsible prior to ordering same in the event that equipment specified and/or approved is incompatible with this requirement.
1.12 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS:
1.12.1 Refer to AIA General Conditions.
1.12.2 Each and every pipe and duct, regardless of material, which passes through a concrete slab, (except slab on grade), masonry wall, roof or other portion of the building structure shall be free from the structure and shall pass through a sleeve furnished and installed by the Subcontractor responsible for the work involved.
1.12.3 Above grade and dry location sleeves shall be constructed from 20 to 22 gauge galvanized steel and shall be flush on both sides of wall surface penetrated. The sleeves shall be sized to allow free passage of the pipe to be inserted, and when this pipe is to be insulated, the sleeves shall be large enough to pass the insulation. Floor sleeves located in pipe chases shall extend up two inches (2") above the floor slab.
1.12.4 Sleeves passing through walls or floors on or below grade and/or in moist areas shall be constructed of galvanized steel, schedule 40 pipe and shall be designed with suitable flange in the center of the floor or wall to form a waterproof passage. After the pipes have been installed in the sleeves, void space around the pipe shall be caulked to insure a waterproof penetration. Fire ratings of rated walls and floors shall be maintained by the use of approved materials.
1.12.5 All penetrations through fire rated ceilings, walls or floors shall be fire stopped using approved materials to maintain the fire rating of the ceiling, wall or floor structure. Fire stop shall be equal to BIO Fireshield, Inc., BIOTHERM 200 or BIO K-2 mortar as applicable. Penetrations shall meet or exceed the requirements set forth in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory, Volumes I and II.
1.12.6 After installation of pipe and duct through sleeves, all sleeves shall be sealed with materials suitable for maintaining thermal resistance, acoustic properties, and weatherproofing of walls, roofs, etc. Refer to Architectural specifications.
1.13 ISOLATION:
1.13.1 Transmission of perceptible vibration, structure-borne noise, or objectional air borne noise to occupied areas by equipment installed under this contract will not be permitted.
1.13.2 The isolation supplier shall be a firm or individual capable of dealing effectively with vibration and noise characteristics, effects and criteria and have facilities and capabilities for measuring and evaluating such disturbances and the preparation of drawings and installation instructions.
1.14 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY:
This contractor assumes all responsibility regarding the safety of his personnel on the project during construction. The Contract Documents do not include materials, procedures, components, etc., required to insure construction safety. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions for additional information.
1.15 DAMAGE:
1.15.1 This Contractor shall be responsible for damage to project caused by this Contractor's failure to recognize hazards associated with items such as leaks, scheduling of work, inexperienced workmen, excessive cutting, etc.
1.15.2 This Contractor shall repair, at no expense to the Owner, any such damage.
1.15.3 This contractor shall familiarize himself with working conditions to the extent that he shall be responsible for damage to concealed piping, wiring and other equipment to remain and shall repair any damage caused by his negligence at no cost to the Owner.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-5
1.16 FLOOR, CEILING AND WALL PLATES:
1.16.1 Refer to AIA General Conditions.
1.16.2 In addition to the requirements of the above referenced portions of this specification, all Subcontractors shall furnish a chromium plated sectional escutcheon in each finished space on each pipe or hanger rod penetrating a wall, floor or ceiling. Escutcheons shall be sized to fit snugly to all lines and where the lines are insulated, the escutcheons shall be fit snugly over the insulation. These plates shall be provided with set screws so that they fit snugly against the finished surface. All equipment rooms are classified as finished space.
1.17 EQUIPMENT NAME PLATE:
Each piece of equipment specified in these contract documents shall have a metal nameplate engraved with the manufacturer's name, the equipment's model number, and the equipment's serial number. The metal nameplate shall also be engraved with the equipment's capacity, voltage, horsepower, manufactured date and the equipment designation (i.e. AHU-1, CH-1, etc.) corresponding with the plans. This metal nameplate shall be fastened to the equipment with pop rivets. Plastic or stick-on type labels will not be acceptable.
1.18 IDENTIFICATION:
1.18.1 Each piece of new equipment specified in these contract documents (the intent is to only label new piping); every valve whose service and/or duty is not readily apparent; each zone duct, outside air duct and return air duct whose duty is not immediately apparent; every piping system except cast iron sewer lines, shall be permanently and clearly identified.
1.18.2 Equipment, valves and duct shall be provided with laminated phenolic nameplates, appropriately engraved with proper identification correlated to the designation shown on the drawings. Punched plastic tape will not be acceptable. Insulated equipment may have identification taped on as for piping system.
1.18.3 Piping systems shall have designation on ten foot (10'-0") centers and closer where required to provide adequate identification, using Brady "all temperature permacode" pipe markers with direction of flow and service indication. Piping systems in mechanical rooms shall be painted and stenciled identifying the system. Color scheme shall be as follows:
Gas Pipe - Yellow Chilled Water - Blue Heating Water - Orange
1.18.4 All these pipe markers shall conform to ANSI-A-13 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems". Arrow markers must have the same ANSI background colors as their companion pipe markers. All marks shall be as manufactured by Brady or approved equal.
1.18.5 A typewritten chart, framed under glass, shall be provided which shall correlate all such identification, abbreviations, valve numbers, color schemes, etc.
1.18.6 Contractor shall obtain written approval of proposed identification scheme prior to application.
1.19 SAFETY GUARDS:
Contractor shall furnish and install all safety guards required. All belt driven equipment, projecting shafts and other rotating parts shall be enclosed or adequately guarded.
1.20 STORAGE OF MATERIALS:
Each contractor shall provide space for storage of materials, equipment or tools at ground level. Any storage contemplated within the building will be allowed only upon specific approval of the Architect.
1.21 LOCAL CUSTOMS:
Each Sub-contractor shall comply with local customs as to which particular trade shall install any part or parts of any work or equipment specified herein.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-6
1.22 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTIONS:
The manufacturers' published directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping and wiring of all equipment and material. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the contract documents and the manufacturers' directions and shall obtain the Architect's instructions before proceeding with the work. Any such work performed that does not comply with the manufacturers' directions shall have deficiencies corrected at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
All materials shall be new and free from defects at the time of installation. Materials or equipment damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged prior to installation shall not be repaired at the job site, but shall be replaced with new materials.
2.2 MANUFACTURER’S REQUIREMENTS:
When a manufacturer's name appears in these specifications, it is not to be construed that the manufacturer does not have to meet the full requirements of the specifications or that his standard cataloged item will be acceptable.
2.3 SERVICE AND REPAIR PARTS:
All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts.
2.4 FLAME SPREAD PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS:
All materials and adhesives used for air conditioning filters, acoustical lining, and insulation shall conform to NFPA and UL life, safety and flame spread properties of materials. The composite classifications shall not exceed 25 for a flame spread rating and 50 for a smoke developed rating for these classifications as listed for the basic materials. The finishes, adhesives, etc., specified for each system and shall be such when completely assembled.
2.5 ACCESS PANELS:
Provide flush mounted metal access panels and frames with concealed hinges and key actuated locks for all concealed and otherwise inaccessible valves, parts, fittings, equipment, filters, etc. and as required for inspection or service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP:
3.1.1 All work shall be done by experienced craftsmen skilled in the applicable trade.
3.1.2 Unprofessional and incomplete work shall be rejected and corrected at the Contractor’s expense.
3.2 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT:
The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of stored materials and installed equipment. Fixtures and equipment, whether located inside or outside, shall be tightly covered with sheet polyethylene or waterproof tarpaulin as protection against dirt, rust, moisture and abuse from other trades. Adequate air circulation shall be provided under any protective sheet to prevent condensate build up. Materials and equipment shall not be stored directly on the ground. Ductwork, piping and equipment shall not be used by other trades as supports for scaffolds or personnel. At the completion of the work, equipment, fixtures, exposed supports and piping shall be cleaned of loose dirt, construction debris, overspray, etc., to the satisfaction of the Architect. Repairs made necessary by damage shall be paid for by the Contractor.
3.3 PROTECTION OF STRUCTURE:
Each Contractor in performing his work shall take particular care not to damage the structure. All finished floors and step treads shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building. In addition, each Contractor shall protect any materials on the job site whether a part of this contract or the property of another Contractor.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-7
3.4 FOUNDATIONS:
3.4.1 Concrete foundations required by mechanical equipment shall be constructed by this Contractor. See Concrete Work.
3.4.2 Equipment shall be set in place on the bases, leveled and aligned by means of shims, piped, then grouted in, in that order. After grouting, the forms shall be removed and the surfaces of the foundation shall be hand-rubbed with carborundum. Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of General Specifications, Concrete Work, of this specification.
3.5 CONFLICTS, INTERFERENCES AND COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES:
3.5.1 The drawings are not to be construed as shop drawings, but indicate the extent, general location, arrangement, etc., of piping systems and equipment. This Contractor shall refer to other sections of the specifications and other drawings such as electrical, structural, architectural, etc., in order to eliminate conflicts and undue delays in the progress of the work. Where other Contractors furnish items requiring piping connections by this Contractor, they will be held responsible for providing roughing-in drawings and assistance upon request.
3.5.2 Each trade shall so harmonize its work with that of the other trades so that the work may be done in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering the other trades. Piping interference shall be handled by giving precedence to pipe lines which require a stated grade for proper operation. Where space requirements conflict, the following order of precedence shall be observed:
A. Building lines
B. Structural members
C. Soil and drain piping
D. Vent piping
E. Refrigerant piping
F. Condensate piping
G. Supply ductwork
H. Exhaust ductwork
I. Domestic water
J. Electrical conduit
K. Natural gas piping
L. Fireline and sprinkler piping
3.5.3 In the event of conflicts between specifications and drawings, drawings shall take precedence over specifications except in matters pertaining to quality, applications, and coordination between trades, which shall be governed by specifications.
3.5.4 Plans, specifications and other documents have been prepared and developed with reasonable professional care and coordination. It is the intent that all documents are supportive and complimentary, one to the other; and as such what is required by one shall be considered as required and binding as if indicated by all. Work indicated shall include, regardless of whether or not specifically indicated, such supportive or required items or work is consistent with what is indicated, is reasonably inferable from what is indicated, and/or is common construction procedure or knowledge with regard to what is indicated.
3.5.5 In the event of conflict between codes, as interpreted by the authority having jurisdiction and the contract documents, the codes shall govern.
3.5.6 In the event of conflict between manufacturer's installation instructions and the drawings, the manufacturer's installation instructions shall govern.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-8
3.5.7 Should discrepancies be found between the documents and/or an interpretation is required, and a decision or interpretation to the contractor is not rendered by the Architect, it shall be assumed the contractor has reviewed all the documents to find the most costly method for items in question which then shall be required. One document does not take precedence over another when interpreting a discrepancy.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
3.6.1 All cutting required by the installation of sleeves, piping, equipment, etc., shall be coordinated with the General Contractor, but performed by this Contractor. Patching shall be by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall not cut any structural element or any finished work without permission from the Architect.
3.6.2 This Contractor shall cut and patch all paving as required by the installation of buried piping, including utilities.
3.7 CONCRETE WORK:
This Contractor shall provide all forming, reinforcing and concrete as indicated such as equipment bases, plumbing stack support, valve and cleanout pads, grease interceptors, catch basin and headwalls. Work shall conform to applicable portion of Division 3 CONCRETE.
3.8 PAINTING:
3.8.1 All painting except "touch-up", mechanical room piping, gas piping, and prime painting for ferrous piping shall be provided under the painting sections (Division 9) unless noted otherwise. All exposed piping, equipment, etc., shall be left clean and free from rust or grease and ready for the painter.
3.8.2 Where equipment finishes are damaged, this Contractor shall obtain matching color touch-up paint from the equipment's manufacturer and paint as required.
3.9 LUBRICATION:
This Contractor shall provide all lubricants for the operation of all equipment until acceptance. The Contractor shall be required to protect all bearings during the installation and shall thoroughly grease steel shafts to prevent corrosion. All motors and other equipment shall be provided with covers as required for proper protection during construction. All equipment bearings requiring periodic lubrication shall be provided with proper fittings for this purpose. Where equipment requiring such lubrication is not readily accessible due to location, copper tubing extensions shall be provided in addition to lubrication fittings.
3.10 ELECTRICAL WORK:
3.10.1 Except for such items that are completely wired at their point of manufacture and so delivered and unless specifically noted to the contrary herein, the Electrical Contractor shall provide all electric wiring (120 VAC and above) for power supply. This includes mounting of all electrical devices furnished under this section (Mechanical) of these specifications.
3.10.2 Conduit and wiring (below 120 VAC) for all automatic controls, temperature control, temperature indication, and interlock shall be provided by the Temperature Controls Contractor. The furnishing of all disconnect switches as required for proper operation as shown on the drawings and required by code will be under Electrical Work, except where specifically designated on the plans. The furnishing of all starters for mechanical equipment will be done under this section (Mechanical) of these specifications, unless specifically scheduled otherwise on a starter schedule on the drawings.
3.10.3 Furnishing of complete wiring diagrams showing power wiring and interlock wiring shall be work under the trade supplying the equipment. Diagrams shall be based on approved equipment and shall be complete integral drawings, not a series of manufacturer's individual diagrams. After these diagrams have been approved by the Architect/Engineer, copies shall be furnished to the trades involved and they shall be followed in detail.
3.10.4 The electrical design and drawings are based on the equipment scheduled and shown on the drawings and should any mechanical equipment requiring changes to the electrical design be approved, the required electrical changes shall be made at the expense of the trade furnishing the changed equipment and at no cost to the Owner.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-9
3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION:
This Contractor shall bring required services to equipment items furnished under other sections of this specification or by the Owner, make final connections, and leave equipment ready for operation. Where it is necessary for Contractors performing work covered by this section to make final connections to items of equipment being furnished by Contractors under other sections, all such work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner and all materials shall be of quality and finish normally used for such installation.
3.12 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION:
When any piece of mechanical or electrical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so providing that he properly cleans the equipment, installs clean filter media, properly adjusts and completes all punch list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and the start of the warranty may not be the same date.
3.13 EQUIPMENT AND AIR INTAKE ARRANGEMENTS:
3.13.1 All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces requiring access. All valves, motors, drives, lubrication devices, filters and other necessary items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part.
3.13.2 Outside air, ventilation and combustion air intakes shall be separated from exhaust air outlets, flues, plumbing vent stacks, etc. to avoid infiltration of odors, fumes and other contaminants. Separation shall be 15 ft. minimum.
3.14 EXECUTION OF WORK:
The Contractor shall plan, schedule and execute his work and that of any of his Sub-contractors so as not to interfere with the work of other trades or Contractors in the building or on the premises.
3.15 FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING:
All building penetrations to outside shall be flashed and counter flashed as required to eliminate leaks.
3.16 TESTS:
All tests shall be made by this Contractor and repeated until approved by the Architect. Piping systems shall not be covered or otherwise concealed until tests have been made and approvals obtained. Notify the Architect four days prior to tests to allow for scheduling. Test the piping systems as indicated in applicable articles.
3.17 CLEAN-UP:
3.17.1 It shall be the responsibility of each trade to cooperate fully with the other trades on the job to help keep the job site in a clean and safe condition. At the end of each day's work, each trade shall properly store all of his tools, equipment, any surplus materials and all debris caused by his portion of the work.
3.17.2 When all work has been finally tested, the Contractor shall clean all work installed by him, including all fixtures, equipment, pipes, ducts and all exposed work. All pipes shall be flushed out and left free of all obstructions. All plates, grilles, and other finished products shall be thoroughly cleaned and polished.
3.18 FINAL OBSERVATIONS:
3.18.1 It shall be the duty of the Contractor to make a careful inspection trip of the entire project, assuring himself that the work on the project is ready for final acceptance, before calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a final observation.
3.18.2 In order not to delay final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall have all necessary bonds, guarantees, receipts, affidavits, etc., called for in the various articles of this specification, prepared and signed in advance, and together with a letter of transmittal listing each paper included, and shall deliver the same to the Architect/Engineer at or before the time of the final observations. The Contractor is cautioned to check over each bond, receipt, etc., before preparing same for submission to see that the items check with the requirements of the specification.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-10
3.19 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE:
3.19.1 Where demolition of equipment or materials is required this Contractor shall minimize cutting and exercise all due caution to leave undamaged surfaces, material and equipment meant to remain.
3.19.2 All existing items that are to be removed shall be legally removed from the site by the Contractor and any salvage value retained by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00-11
SECTION 23 05 03
HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
Work in this section shall include piping, fittings, accessories etc., to be used in piping systems in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents and shall include the following principal items:
Piping Valves Piping Accessories
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). B. American Society of Testing & Materials (ASTM). C. American Welding Society. D. American Water Works Association (AWWA). E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). F. National Bureau of Standards (NBS).
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
Submittals are required as indicated only. Submittal of pipe and fittings is not required unless a deviation from the specification is proposed.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with ASME code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND:
2.1.1 Piping above ground shall be standard weight black steel Grade 53 Schedule 40 with welding type fittings per ASTM A-120-55 for 3" in size and larger. Piping 2-1/2" and smaller in size shall be the same material as stated above and shall be assembled with 125 psi screwed malleable iron fittings. At Contractor's option, Type "L" hard drawn copper with wrought copper solder joint fitting and bronze valves may be used for piping 2" and smaller.
2.1.2 The Contractor shall have the option of using Victaulic couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties to assemble the above ground piping in lieu of welded or threaded connections.
2.1.3 Valves shall be of first quality line equal to Nibco, Stockham or Crane Company. Valves shall be the same working pressure and materials as fittings specified for the service. Provide stem extensions for insulated valves equal to Nibco's Nib-Seal extended handle. (Reference Section 23 07 00 for insulation thickness.) All valves shall be suitable for repacking under pressure and all valves shall not be designed for less than 200 psi working pressure.
2.2 EQUIPMENT DRAINS, OVERFLOWS AND RELIEF PIPING:
2.2.1 Condensate drain piping, auxiliary drain piping, and equipment drain piping shall be type "L" hard drawn copper piping with cast and/or wrought copper fittings per ASTM B-88, 95/5 solder. Provide pipe supports at specified intervals with only copper-plated, copper or brass in contact with copper piping.
2.2.2 All drain piping shall be installed with a minimum fall of 1/8" per foot unless noted otherwise on plan.
2.2.3 The size of condensate drain piping from HVAC equipment shall be indicated on the plans. Where no size is shown, piping shall not be less than 3/4" and in no case less than in accordance with the following schedule:
HVAC PIPING 23 05 03 - 1
Coil Nominal Tonnage Copper Pipe Size
Up to 2 3/4"
2 1/2 to 5 1"
6 to 14 1 1/4"
15 to 30 1 1/2"
2.2.4 The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide all drain piping required for or related to HVAC equipment whether indicated on plan or not. Coordinate all termination points required with the Plumbing Subcontractor.
2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. Conform to ASME, ASTM and MSS SP requirements. B. Hangers for pipe sizes ½ to 1-1/2 inches: carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. C. Hangers for cold pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger: carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. D. Hangers for hot pipe sizes 2 to 4 inches: carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. E. Hangers for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and larger: adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. F. Multiple or trapeze hangers: steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. G. Multiple or trapeze hangers for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and larger: steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. H. Wall support for pipe sizes 3 inches and smaller: cast iron hooks. I. Wall support for pipe sizes 4 inches and larger: welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. J. Wall Support for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and larger: welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. K. Vertical support: steel riser clamp. L. Floor support for cold pipe: cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. M. Floor support for hot pipe 4 inches and smaller: cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. N. Floor support for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and larger: adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. O. Copper pipe support: carbon steel rings, adjustable, copper plated. P. Hanger rods: mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on end, or continuous threaded. Q. Inserts: malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.4 GATE VALVES:
A. 2-1/2 inches and smaller MSS SP 80, Class 125 equal to Nibco T-113 screwed or Nibco S-113 or Milwaukee 115 solder joint. B. 3 inches and larger MSS SP 70, Class 125 equal to Nibco F-619 or Milwaukee F2882A cast iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, hand-wheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.
2.5 BALL VALVES:
A. 2 inches and smaller MSS SP 110, 600 psi, equal to Nibco S-585-70, solder joint, two-piece bronze body, chrome plated brass ball, reinforced TFE seats, blow-out proof stem, full-port quarter-turn.
2.6 PLUG VALVES/BALANCING COCKS:
A. 2-1/2 inches and smaller MSS SP 78, Class 150 equal to homestead or Rockwell Figure 142 lubricated, screwed, wrench operated. Furnish one plug valve wrench for every ten plug-valves with minimum of one wrench. B. 2-1/2 inches and larger MSS SP 78, Class 150 equal to Homestead or Rockwell Figure 143, lubricated, bolted gland, semi-steel flanged type.
HVAC PIPING 23 05 03 - 2
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES:
Butterfly valves shall be Demco, Nibco, Milwaukee or equal wafer type butterfly valves, suitable for pressures and temperatures involved. Butterfly valves may be substituted for balance cocks and shut-off valves. A flanged spool shall be installed on both sides of each butterfly valve.
2.8 CHECK VALVES:
Check valves 2" and smaller shall be Nibco T-413-Y screwed or S-413-Y solder joint, or Milwaukee 510-T screwed or 1510-T solder joint. Check valves 2 1/2" and larger shall be Nibco F-918-B or Milwaukee F2974A iron body, bronze mounted, flanged end.
2.10 BALANCING VALVES:
Calibrated balancing valves shall be equal to B & G circuit setters equipped with brass readout valves fitted with an integral EPT insert, and check valve to minimize system fluid loss during balancing and monitoring process. Each balancing valve shall have a calibrated nameplate, be constructed with internal seals to prevent leakage, and be supplied with pre-formed polyurethane insulation suitable for use on heating and cooling systems.
2.11 FLOW CONTROL VALVES:
Automatic flow control valves shall be automatic pressure compensating type. Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to required capacity with +5% accuracy. Variable orifice shall be stainless steel construction and shall be easily removed and replaced without removing the valve body from the pipe line. Provide a metal identification tag w/chain for each valve, marked w/unit identification, valve model number, and rated flow in GPM. Valves shall be as manufactured by Griswold or Autoflow, Inc.
2.12 PIPING ACCESSORIES GENERAL:
2.12.1 Flanges shall be slip-on or butt welding standard weight 1/16" raised face type with gaskets.
2.12.2 Unions shall be all bronze for copper systems and malleable iron with ground joint for steel piping systems. Provide dielectric unions for joining dissimilar metallic piping systems.
2.12.3 Weldolets and threadolets shall be steel per ANSI B16.9.
2.12.4 Escutcheons shall be single piece, set screw type, chrome plated and shall cover the opening and sleeve.
2.13 HYDRONIC PIPING ACCESSORIES:
2.13.1 Flexible pipe connections shall be neoprene double arch type rated at 150 psi flanged connection with back- up rings and control units.
2.13.2 Air vents shall be automatic float type for all high points of the piping systems with brass stop cock.
2.13.3 Pipe cleaning chemical shall be hydronic cleaner specifically formulated for flushing out hydronic systems.
2.13.4 Flow meters shall be indicating (diverting) type equal to Bell & Gossett Thermoflo Indicator.
2.14 THERMOMETERS, PRESSURE GAUGES AND TEST PLUGS:
2.14.1 Provide thermometers and pressure gauges where shown on drawings and where required for testing and balancing system. The instruments shall be of the same manufacturer throughout.
2.14.2 Pipe thermometers shall be adjustable angle type equal to Weksler type AA5, with separable socket. Thermometers shall have cast aluminum cases with baked enamel finish, red reading mercury tubes with black scale graduations, and glass covers. Scales shall be a minimum of 9 inches with appropriate ranges for indicating temperatures at least 25% above and below normal readings. Sockets shall have stem length suitable for pipe receiving thermometer. Sockets on insulated pipes shall have lagging extensions of adequate length to clear insulation.
Acceptable manufacturers: Marsh, Trerice, Weksler
HVAC PIPING 23 05 03 - 3
2.14.3 Pressure gauges shall be bourdon tube with minimum accuracy 1.5% of full scale, equal to Weksler type AY14. Gauges shall have direct mounting aluminum cases, filled with glycerine-water mixture, not less than 4-1/2" dials, black scale graduations, and glass cover. Scales shall have a minimum arc of 260 degrees with appropriate ranges for indicting pressures at least 25% above normal operating range.
Gauges shall be installed with 1/4", 250 psi brass tee handle cocks, equal to Weksler type A10, and filter type pressure snubbers, equal to Weksler type BW42. Provide pigtails for pressure gauges in steam service.
Acceptable manufacturers: March, Trerice, Weksler
2.14.4 Temperature and pressure test plugs shall consist of 1/4" MPT brass fittings with gaskets cap and Nordel core, rated for 1000 psi and 275 degrees F. The double valve self-sealing core shall be designed to receive a 1/8 inch O.D. temperature or pressure probe. Test plugs in insulated pipes shall be extended above insulation.
Acceptable manufacturers: Pete's Plumbing, R.E. Meyers TAP-110, Fairfax
2.14.5 Test gauges should consist of one thermometer and one pressure gauge with appropriate adapters for testing and balancing the system. Thermometer shall be externally adjustable with bi-metal element, stainless steel case and stem, 1/2% accuracy, glass cover 0 to 220 degrees F scale, 6" stem, equal to Weksler type 2R06. Gauge shall be bourdon type with 3-1/2" dial, direct mounting aluminum case, 0 to 200 psi scale with black graduations, 1/2 percent accuracy, glass cover equal to Weksler type AA1. Provide gauge adapter equal to R. E. Meyers Tap-500. After completion of project, the thermometer and pressure gauge with adapter will be left with the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION:
3.1.1 The piping systems required under the Mechanical division of these specifications shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All pipe hangers shall be of the type mentioned in this section and shall be so spaced and installed as to maintain a rigid piping system, adequately supported both laterally and vertically.
3.1.2 At each piece of equipment, shut-off valves shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor so that these groups of fixtures or pieces of equipment may be isolated from accessible locations. Provide General Contractor with locations of all access doors. Access doors required for these valves shall be furnished by this Contractor.
3.1.3 Each of the piping systems shall be installed to provide for expansion and contraction and the joints shall be soldered at such time that the system is not under strain.
3.1.4 Necessary spring pieces and offsets shall be furnished by this Contractor as required.
3.1.5 Each of the piping systems shall be concealed in chases and above ceilings and in walls in all finished areas and shall be run exposed only as specifically specified or as shown on the drawings in machinery spaces or unfinished areas.
3.1.6 Exposed piping shall be held close to the walls and ceilings and necessary fittings shall be provided and installed to allow for offsets to hold the piping close to wall and ceilings. Where these lines run exposed a clearance shall be obtained from the Architect in writing before making the installation.
3.1.7 All valves shall be so located as to make the removal of their bonnets possible. All flanged valves shown in the horizontal positions shall be mounted with valve stem inclined one bolt hole above the horizontal lines shall be "made-up" with valve stem inclined at an angle of thirty (30) degrees above the horizontal position. All valve stems must be true and straight at the time the system is tested for final acceptance.
3.1.8 Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and worked into place without springing or forcing.
3.1.9 Provide clearance for installation of insulation and for access to valves, air vents, drain and unions.
3.1.10 Slope piping as indicated and provide automatic air vent at all high points of the systems. Extend 1/4" soft copper extensions from vents to suitable drain where air vents are in inaccessible locations.
3.1.11 Provide a 1/2" thick foam plastic insulating sleeve-protector on all copper and plastic piping penetrations of concrete slab-on-grade prior to pouring of concrete.
HVAC PIPING 23 05 03 - 4
3.1.12 Locate and suspend piping in such a manner so as to minimize transmission of vibration and noise.
3.1.13 All piping penetrations through fire rated ceilings, walls or floors shall be fire stopped using approved materials to maintain the fire rating of the ceiling, wall or floor structure. Fire stop shall be equal to BIO Fireshield, Inc., BIOTHERM 200 or BIO K-2 mortar as applicable.
3.1.14 All piping connections to equipment and fixtures shall contain flanges or unions to allow easy removal whether or not shown on the plans.
3.1.15 Install a continuous length of tracer wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic pipe installed underground. Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it will not be displaced during construction operations.
3.1.16 Air gaps for all indirect waste connections (open-sight) shall be at least twice the effective drain piping diameter and in no case less than 2".
3.2 PIPING JOINTS:
3.2.1 Screwed joints shall have full cut pipe threads. Joints shall be assembled with an approved compound applied to only the male threads. A minimum of three pipe threads shall remain exposed when the joint is assembled.
3.2.2 Welded pipe joints shall be fusion welded by a metallic arc welding process. The welding operations shall conform to the current recommendations of the American Welding Society. This Contractor's welder, employed on this project, shall have passed qualification tests as prescribed by the National Pipe Welding Bureau or other reputable testing laboratory using qualification procedures as recommended by the ASME Boiler Construction Code or American Welding Standards.
3.2.3 Mechanical coupling joints shall be assembled in strict accordance with the recommendations of the coupling joint manufacturer. The bolts, fasteners, gaskets and lubricants shall be a product of, or shall adhere rigidly to, the specification requirements of the joint manufacturer.
3.2.4 Solder joints shall be assembled with square cut pipe using a pipe cutter. Hack saw cut pipe ends shall be reamed to full size. Both the pipe and fittings shall be furnished absolutely clean. Brazing flux shall be applied to both the pipe and the fittings. The use of corrosive acid flux will not be permitted. During the brazing, the pipe and fittings must be charged with nitrogen gas.
3.3 SECURING AND SUPPORTING OF PIPE:
3.3.1 All pipe shall be supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers and supports. Piping shall be supported to maintain required grade and pitch, prevent vibration and provide for expansion/contraction.
3.3.2 All hangers shall be secured to approved inserts wherever possible and practicable. Hanger inserts shall be set in place before concrete is poured. Where hangers attach to the structural steel framing, approved beam clamps shall be employed. Where required, the Mechanical Subcontractor shall install channels to span between framing members. In no case shall spacing of hangers for horizontal piping be greater than indicated on the following schedule:
FERROUS (SCHEDULE 40) PIPING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE HANGER SPACING (MAXIMUM) 1/2" 5'-0" 3/4" 6'-0" 1" 7'-0" 1-1/2" 8'-0" 2" to 6" 10'-0"
COPPER PIPING/TUBING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE HANGER SPACING (MAXIMUM) Up to 1-1/2" 6'-0" 2" and larger 8'-0"
HVAC PIPING 23 05 03 - 5
3.3.3 Vertical lines shall be adequately supported at their bases, either by a suitable hanger placed in the horizontal line near the riser, or by a base fitting set on a pedestal or foundation and from each floor slab by means of approved clamp type support bearing on the slab or beam. In no case shall the spacing of supports for vertical piping be greater than indicated on the following schedule:
FERROUS (SCHEDULE 40) PIPING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE SUPPORT SPACING (MAXIMUM) All pipe sizes At the base and at each story level, not exceeding 30'-0" intervals
COPPER PIPING/TUBING
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE SUPPORT SPACING (MAXIMUM) Up to 1-1/4" 4'-0" 1-1/2" and larger At the base and at each story level, not exceeding 15'-0" intervals
3.3.4 Hangers for piping 2" and smaller shall be of the split cast ring type with fastening device. Hangers for piping larger than 2" shall be of the adjustable clevis hanger type. Hanger rods shall be minimum 3/8" diameter and shall have machine threads. Brackets of approved type may be used along walls. Hanger rods for individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be steel rods of size indicated on the following table:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE (MAXIMUM) 1/2" to 2" 3/8" 2-1/2" to 3" 1/2" 4" 5/8" 5" to 6" 3/4"
3.3.5 Hangers for use with copper piping shall be copper plated ferrous sizes for copper tubing.
3.3.6 Hangers shall be installed within 2'-0" of each change in direction, either vertical or horizontal, or pipe tee and on each side of valves, strainers, etc.
3.3.7 Multiple horizontal pipes, smaller than 12" diameter pipe, may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze spacing shall be in accordance with the schedule for pipe spacing based upon the smallest pipe. The trapeze members shall be properly sized for the piping load they are to support.
3.3.8 Where "cold" pipes are insulated with a vapor sealing jacket, the hanger shall be oversized accordingly to accommodate the outside diameter of the insulation, and half-round 16 gauge galvanized steel shields, not less than 14" long, rolled to fit the insulation diameter, shall be provided between the insulation and the hanger.
3.3.9 Pipe supports shall be as manufactured by Fee and Mason, Grinnell, F&S Manufacturing, or prior-approved equal.
3.4 INSTALLATION – INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.
B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches (100 mm) and larger.
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut [above] [flush with top of] [recessed into and grouted flush with] slab.
HVAC PIPING 23 05 03 - 6
3.5 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install in accordance with ASME, ASTM and MSS SP.
B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze hangers.
H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
END OF SECTION
HVAC PIPING 23 05 03 - 7
SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SOUND CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and general Mechanical/Electrical Requirements apply to the work specified in the Section.
1.2 NOISE CRITERIA:
The acoustical requirements of the project are mandatory. Mechanical system designs, equipment selections and Noise/Vibration Control hardware selections have been made to provide guidance for the required acoustical performance. However, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to assure proper selection, placement and installation of equipment, duct systems and vibration isolation hardware to maintain airborne and structure-borne noise and vibration levels at or below the Noise Criterion as listed in the ASHRAE guide for applicable spaces as measured 4' above finished floor with ceiling, wall covering, drapes and specified floor covering installed.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK:
1.3.1 The work under this Section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and performing operations necessary for the complete installation of noise and vibration isolation devices and systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, to reduce noise and vibration to specified levels.
1.3.2 The types of vibration isolation work and sound control specified in this Section include the following items. Not all items will apply to every project.
A. Vibration Isolation Hardware for Mechanical and Electrical Equipment.
B. Inertia Base Frames and Structural Steel Bases used in conjunction with isolation hardware.
C. Flexible Connections in Piping System.
D. Vibration Hangers for certain equipment, piping, and ductwork.
E. Isolation Systems for Roof Mounted Equipment.
F. Noise Control Barrier Duct Wrap
G. Isolation Pipe Sleeves.
1.3.3 Internal isolation provided by equipment manufacturers are not considered sufficient for total vibration control and will not be considered as a substitution for any hardware in this specification.
1.3.4 Seismic Controls and Restraints shall be furnished on all isolators to suit the project location code jurisdiction.
1.3.5 The type of isolator, base and minimum static deflection shall be as required for each specific equipment application as recommended by the isolator or equipment manufacturer but subject to minimum requirements indicated in the schedule at the end of this section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
1.4.1 Manufacturer’s Data, Vibration Isolation and Sound Control: A. Submit the required copies of specifications, detailed drawings, performance characteristics and installation instructions for each type of hardware to be used.
B. For spring isolators, show deflection capacity, spring diameter, free height, solid compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness.
C. For pad-type units show free and operating heights plus the natural frequency of the material.
VIBRATION ISOLATION & SOUND CONTROL 23 05 48--1
D. For Roof Top Isolation Systems, inertia bases, and rail base systems provide detailed drawings based on the actual isolated equipment indicating the equipment location on the system and the placement location of isolators.
1.4.2 Shop drawings, Vibration Isolation:
A. Submit shop drawings showing structural design and details of any other custom-fabricated work not covered by submitted data.
B. For isolated equipment, show isolator model number and its location under the equipment.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.5.1 Product Qualifications - Provide each type of vibration isolation unit produced by a specialized manufacturer, with not less than five (5) years successful experience in the production of units similar to those specified for the project.
1.5.2 All isolators and isolating material shall be supplied by single source to insure total responsibility for vibration and objectionable noise. Isolation supplier shall be capable of furnishing necessary drawings and installation instructions required for project and shall possess necessary instruments to verify vibration and sound levels. Prior to acceptance of job by Owner, isolation supplier shall inspect the job and furnish Engineer with written certification that all isolation materials furnished by him are installed in proper manner. Any deviations from specifications shall be approved in writing by Engineer. Any deviations not approved by Engineer shall be corrected by Contractor at his own expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ISOLATION MOUNTS AND BASES:
2.1.1 Type 1 Mounts - Precompressed molded fiberglass isolation pads, neoprene-jacketed and stabilized during manufacture. Pads shall be sized for 40 to 200 psi loading with a constant natural frequency of approximately 10.5 Hz. Glass fibers shall be produced by a multiple flame attenuation process which generates nominal fiber diameters not to exceed .00018 inches. Where the equipment base does not provide a uniform load surface, suitable steel plates shall be bonded to the top of the pads.
2.1.2 Type 2 Mounts - Freestanding, unhoused, lateral stable spring mounts, incorporating leveling bolts and 1/4" thick noise isolation pads. To assure stability, the lateral spring stiffness shall be greater than 1.0 times the rated vertical stiffness. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel of 50% between the designed operation height and the solid height.
2.1.3 Type 3 Mounts - Freestanding, laterally stable spring isolators, similar to Type 2, but shall incorporate vertical limit stops to assure a constant operating height if the supported weight is removed, and to reduce movement due to wind loads. Limit stops shall be isolated from the housing to prevent short-circuiting. Outdoor mounts shall be non-rust construction.
2.1.4 Type 1 Hangers - Combination spring and fiberglass hangers, incorporating 2" thick neoprene-jacketed precompressed molded fiberglass inserts in series with springs, all encased in stamped welded steel brackets. The same stability and over load specifications as listed for Type 2 mounts shall apply. Hanger will allow support rod misalignment thru a 30° arc without short circuiting. Isolation brackets will carry a 500% overload without failure.
2.1.5 Type 2 Hangers - Neoprene coated, precompressed fiberglass hanger, encased in welded steel bracket with pad load plates. Same bracket and misalignment specs as Type 1.
2.1.6 Type 3 Hanger - Same as Type 1 except no fiberglass insert.
2.1.7 Type 4 Hanger - Same as Type 2 except designed for suspended ceiling.
2.1.8 Type 1 Bases - Structural steel bases, designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. The bases are designed with isolator brackets to reduce the mounting height of the equipment. To assure adequate stiffness, the height of the members shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, or at least 6".
VIBRATION ISOLATION & SOUND CONTROL 23 05 48--2
2.1.9 Type 2 Bases - Reinforced concrete inertia bases, the steel members of which are designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. The concrete shall be poured into this welded steel channel frame, incorporating 1/2" diameter reinforcing bars on 8" centers each way. Recessed isolator mounting brackets shall be used to reduce the mounting height of the equipment bu yet remain within the confines of the base perimeter. The thickness of the bases shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, at least 6", or as indicated on the drawings. Where the inertia bases are used to mount pumps, the bases shall be large enough to support the pipe elbow.
2.1.10 Type 3 Bases - Same specifications as Type 1 Base, but supplied with factory welded cross members to form a structural frame.
2.2 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS:
2.2.1 General - Comply with minimum operating static deflections scheduled.
2.2.2 Manufacturer’s Recommendations - Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer recommendations on application and installation of vibration isolation materials and units.
2.3 APPLICATIONS:
2.3.1 General - Noise and vibration isolator types, minimum operating static deflections, and supplemental bases shall be provided for individual mechanical equipment units according to selection criteria as tabulated in the guidance schedule at the end of this section unless specified otherwise.
2.3.2 Ductwork Treatment:
Flexible Connections shall be incorporated in the ductwork adjacent to all air-moving units and will be suitable for the pressures involved. These are to be furnished by the sheet metal contractor.
2.3.3 Piping Treatment: - All piping over 1" three supports away from isolated mechanical equipment shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolators. Suspended piping shall be isolated with spring hangers in the supporting rods. Hangers shall be Type 3 hangers as specified. Floor mounted piping shall be supported directly on Type 2 spring mounts, as described above. Flexible connections shall be incorporated in the piping attached to all isolated equipment.
2.3.4 Equipment Room and Roof Penetrations - All piping, conduit ductwork, etc., penetrating floors, ceilings, or partitions of equipment rooms on roof shall be isolated using precompressed molded fiberglass pipe sleeves and tightly packed low density fiberglass shall be used in the case of ductwork. All penetrations shall be completely caulked airtight with suitable resilient sealant on both sides of penetration in accordance with prevailing fire code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
3.1.1 General - Except as otherwise indicated, comply with isolation hardware manufacturer instructions for the installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and systems. Adjust to insure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points.
Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation.
A. Do not anchor and attach units to structure unless specifically stated on drawings or in manufacturers’ installation instructions. Refer to applicable Seismic Code when required.
A. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units are required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly.
C. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that a minimum of 2" clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation.
VIBRATION ISOLATION & SOUND CONTROL 23 05 48--3
3.2 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK:
3.2.1 Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe the installation of other work related to vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration/isolation work, and after completion of other related work (but before equipment start up), shall furnish a written report to the Engineer listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
A. Equipment installation (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators.
B. Piping connections including flexible connections.
C. Ductwork connections including flexible connections.
B. Passage of piping and ductwork which is to be isolated through walls and floors and roofs.
3.2.2 Do not Start Up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the vibration isolation supplier.
3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL SCHEDULE:
Provide vibration isolation control items as scheduled below unless specified otherwise or noted otherwise on plans: MINIMUM DEFLECTION LOCATION/SERVICE BASE TYPE ISOLATOR TYPE (in.)
AHU –1 THRU 5 Type 3 Base Type 1 Spring Mounts 2.0
END OF SECTION
VIBRATION ISOLATION & SOUND CONTROL 23 05 48--4
SECTION 23 05 90
CLEANING AND TESTING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL:
Refer to Section 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC.
1.2 SCOPE:
1.2.1 This Contractor shall, at his own expense, before beginning work, during the progress of the work, or upon its completion, make such tests of his work as are herein specified in accordance with all laws, governing authorities, or as are required by Architect or by state or municipal bureaus having jurisdiction and under their supervision. The Contractor shall provide all apparatus, temporary piping connections or any other requirements necessary for such tests. He shall take all due precautions to prevent damage to building or its contents incurred by such tests, as he will be required to repair and make good, at his own expense, any damage so caused. Any leaks, defects or deficiencies discovered as a result of the tests shall be immediately repaired or made good and test shall be repeated until the test requirements are fully complied with. No caulking of pipe joints to remedy leaks will be permitted.
1.2.2 No work of any nature shall be covered, enclosed or otherwise concealed until properly inspected, tested and approved. Any leaks which develop during any of the tests shall be corrected with new material and made as good as required; said tests shall be repeated until the work is satisfactory to Architect and the mechanical inspectors in every way.
1.2.3 Each separate system with its various components shall be operated by this Contractor for a reasonable length of time to demonstrate the performance of all equipment and piping in accordance with the true intent and purpose of the plans and specifications. All necessary adjustments shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect.
1.2.4 All motor driven equipment shall be proved operable generally in accordance with the intent of these specifications.
1.2.5 All electrical power and water for testing of air conditioning and/or heating equipment systems shall be provided by the General Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING AND ADJUSTING:
3.1.1 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems: Each and every phase of the new air conditioning, heating and ventilating systems shall be operated separately, or in conjunction with the others for a period of time to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Architect the ability of the equipment to meet the capacity and performance requirements while maintaining design conditions in accordance with the true intent and purpose of these specifications. Heating and cooling capacities and performance for every system shall be checked in the winter and summer, respectively. Any adjustments and/or startup required shall be done at no additional cost to the owner. Any adjustments done during one season shall not affect capacities and performance during the other season. The volume of air at each outlet and inlet, air conditioning equipment performance data, etc., shall be tabulated and required balancing performed by engineering personnel skilled, trained and experienced in the performance of these functions. Previous to such performance tests, this Contractor shall have set all valves, dampers, motors, controllers, thermostats, etc., and shall have the system operating and maintaining design temperatures, humidity and air circulation throughout all areas of the building. This Contractor shall also at the proper time make such additional adjustments as may be required to obtain consistent temperatures throughout the project. See Section 23 05 93 of these specifications.
CLEANING AND TESTING FOR HVAC 23 05 90 - 1
3.2 NOISE LEVEL:
3.2.1 All items of equipment shown on the plans and specified herein have been selected so that the anticipated noise level in the building from the air conditioning and other systems will not be above 30NC level.
3.2.2 If the Contractor wishes to make substitution of equipment from that selected, he must satisfy himself and the Engineer that the noise level in the building will not exceed 30NC.
END OF SECTION
CLEANING AND TESTING FOR HVAC 23 05 90 - 2
SECTION 23 05 93: TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
All division 23 specification sections, drawings and general provisions of the contract apply to work of this section, as do other documents referred to in this section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK:
1.2.1 The Contractor shall obtain the services of an Independent Test and Balance (TAB) Company which specializes in the testing and balancing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) systems to test, adjust and balance all HVAC systems in the building(s).
1.2.2 The work included in this section consists of furnishing labor, instruments and tools required in testing, adjusting and balancing the HVAC systems as described in these specifications or shown on accompanying drawings. Services shall include checking equipment performance, taking the specified measurements and recording and reporting the results. The testing, adjusting and balancing agency shall act as a reporting agency; that is, list and report each piece of equipment as to identification number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, proper location, specified performance and report actual performance of all equipment as found during testing. The report is intended to be used during the life of the building as a ready reference indicating original conditions, equipment components, etc.
1.2.3 Representatives of the Test and Balance Company shall visit the job site during installation of the HVAC equipment, piping and ductwork as required.
1.2.4 Upon completion of the HVAC system installation, the Test and Balance Company shall perform all required testing and balancing with the full cooperation of the Contractor and his Subcontractors. The Contractor shall make changes and/or adjustments to the HVAC system components that are required by the Test and Balance Company to accomplish proper balancing. The TAB agency shall not supply or install any materials or balancing devices, such as pulleys, drives, belts, etc. All of this work is by the Contractor and shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.2.5 The test and balance report complete with a summary page listing all deficiencies shall be submitted to the Architect for review by his Mechanical Engineer. If the Mechanical Engineer agrees with the report, he shall sign it and return it to the Architect. The test and balance report must be complete and must be accepted by the Engineer prior to acceptance of the project. Any outstanding test and balance items shall be placed on the punch list and a monetary value shall be assigned to them.
1.2.6 After all deficiencies have been corrected the Mechanical Engineer shall sign the testing and balancing report and the Test and Balance Company shall supply four (4) copies of the final and complete report to the Architect for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.2.7 The items requiring testing, adjusting and balancing include (but are not restricted to) the following:
AIR SYSTEMS:
Supply Fan AHU Zone branch and main ducts VAV systems Diffusers, Registers, Grilles and Dampers Coils (Air Temperatures) Valves Vibration Isolators
HYDRONIC SYSTEMS:
Pumps Chillers Boilers Coils
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS, REFERENCES, STANDARDS:
All work shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) National Standards or the latest standards of the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). If these contract documents set forth more stringent requirements than the AABC National Standards or the NEBB Standards, these contract documents shall prevail.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS:
Agency Qualifications: The TAB Agency shall be a current member of the AABC or the NEBB and must be in good standing with FP&C. A list of these firms shall be obtained from FP&C. Falsification of a TAB report shall be grounds for removal from the FP&C list and the firm's actions shall be reported to the appropriate certifications agency. The contractor may use any FP&C approved TAB firm on a state project.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
1.5.1 Procedures and Agenda: The TAB agency shall submit the TAB procedures and agenda proposed to be used.
1.5.2 Sample Forms: The TAB agency shall submit sample forms, which shall include the minimum data required by the AABC National Standards or the NEBB Standards.
1.6 TAB PREPARATION AND COORDINATION:
1.6.1 Shop drawings, submittal data, up-to-date revisions, change orders, fan curves, pump curves and other data required for planning, preparation and execution of the TAB work shall be provided when available and no later than 30 days after the Designer has returned the final approved submittal data to the Contractor.
1.6.2 System installation and equipment startup shall be complete prior to the TAB agency's being notified to begin.
1.6.3 The building control system (BCS) contractor shall provide and install the control system, including all temperature, pressure and humidity sensors. These shall be calibrated for accurate control. If applicable, the BCS contractor shall install all necessary computers and computer programs and make these operational. Assistance shall be provided as required for reprogramming, coordination and problem resolution.
1.6.4 All test points, balancing devices, identification tags, etc., shall be accessible and clear of insulation and other obstructions that would impede TAB procedures.
1.6.5 Qualified installation or startup personnel shall be readily available for the operation and adjustment of the systems. Assistance shall be provided as required for coordination and problem resolution.
1.7 REPORTS
1.7.1 Final TAB Report - The TAB agency shall submit the final TAB report for review by the Architect. On plans provided, all outlets, devices, HVAC equipment, etc., shall be identified (including manufacturer, model number, serial number, motor manufacturer, HP, drive type, fan and motor sheaves and belt number), along with a numbering system corresponding to report unit identification. The TAB agency shall submit an AABC "National Project Performance Guaranty" (or similar NEBB Guaranty) assuring that the project systems were tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance with the project specifications and AABC National Standards (or similar NEBB Standards). The Designer shall certify his approval on the Performance Guaranty.
1.7.2 Submit 4 copies of the Final TAB Report to the Architect for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
PART 2 - INSTRUMENTATION
All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibrated. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with the requirements of AABC National Standards (or similar NEBB Standards).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 The specified systems shall be reviewed and inspected for conformance to design documents. Testing, adjusting and balancing on each identified system shall be performed. The accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 2
AABC National Standards (or similar NEBB Standards). Adjustment tolerances shall be + or - 10% unless otherwise stated.
3.1.2 Equipment settings, including manual damper quadrant positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices shall be marked to show final settings.
3.1.3 All information necessary to complete a proper TAB project and report shall be per AABC or NEBB standards unless otherwise noted. The descriptions of work required, as listed in this section, are a guide to the minimum information needed.
3.1.4 TAB contractor shall cut insulation, ductwork and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. Upon completion, patch insulation, ductwork, and housings using materials identical to those removed. Seal insulation to reestablish integrity of the vapor barrier.
3.1.5 TAB work shall include additional inspection and adjustment of components during the season following the initial balance to include re-balance of any items influenced by seasonal changes or as directed by the Owner.
3.2 AIR SYSTEMS:
3.2.1 The TAB agency shall verify that all ductwork, splitters, extractors, dampers, grilles, registers, and diffusers have been installed per design, are functional and set full open. Any leakage in the ductwork shall be repaired prior to the test. The TAB agency shall perform the following TAB procedures in accordance with the AABC National Standards or NEBB Standards:
For supply fans:
1. Fan Speeds - Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements.
2. Current and Voltage - Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure fan motor is not in or above the service factor.
3. Pitot-Tube Traverse - Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main supply and return ducts, as applicable to obtain total CFM. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet.
4. Outside Air - Test and adjust the outside air on applicable equipment using a Pitot-tube traverse. If a traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet. If a traverse is not practical use the mixed-air temperature method if the inside and outside temperature differences is at least 20 degrees Fahrenheit or use the difference between Pitot-tube traverse of the supply and return air ducts.
5. Static Pressure - Test and record system static pressure, including the static pressure profile of each supply fan.
For zone, branch and main ducts:
1. Adjust ducts to within design CFM requirements. As applicable, at least one zone balancing damper shall be completely open. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open.
For VAV systems:
1. Identify the type, location and size of each terminal box. This information shall be recorded on terminal box data sheets.
2. Test, adjust and record the maximum and minimum box air quantities for each VAV box.
3. Set volume regulators on all terminal boxes to meet design maximum and minimum CFM requirements.
4. Test and record entering and leaving air temperature of hot water coils with full heating air flow and water flow.
5. Insure the entering static pressure is sufficient for normal, proper box operation.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 3
For diffusers, registers and grilles:
1. Tolerances - Test, adjust, and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design requirements. Minimize drafts. Include required CFM, initial test CFM and final CFM. 2. Identification - Identify the type, location, and size of each grille, diffuser, and register. This information shall be recorded on air outlet data sheets.
For coils:
1. Air Temperature - Once air flows are set to acceptable limits, take wet bulb and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry-bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering and leaving side of each heating coil.
3.3 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS:
3.3.1 The TAB agency shall, as applicable, verify that all hydronic equipment, piping, and coils have been filled and purged; that strainers have been cleaned; and that all balancing valves (except bypass valves) are set full open. Examine water in system and determine if it has been treated and cleaned. As applicable, it shall check air vents and expansion or compression tank for proper operation. The TAB agency shall perform the following testing and balancing functions in accordance with the AABC National Standards (or similar NEBB Standards):
For pumps:
1. Test and adjust chilled water and hot water pumps to meet design GPM requirements. Check pump rotation and verify impeller size. Check pumps for proper operation. Pumps shall be free of vibration and cavitation. Record appropriate gauge readings for final TDH and Block-Off/Dead head calculations. List pump N.P.S.H. (as applies).
2. Current and Voltage - Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure pump motor is not in or above the service factor.
For chillers:
1. Verify that chillers have been started by others and are in operation. Test and adjust chiller water flows to within 10% of design requirements by observing differential pressure gauge and setting balance valves.
2. Current and Voltage - Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure compressor motor is not in or above the service factor.
3. Test and record entering and leaving temperature and pressure profiles of chillers.
For boilers:
1. Verify that boilers have been filled and started by others, and are in operation.
2. Current and Voltage - As applicable, test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure motor is not in or above the service factor.
3. Test and adjust water flow through water boilers.
4. Test and record entering and leaving temperature and pressure profiles of water or steam boilers.
For coils:
1. Tolerances - Test, adjust, and balance all chilled-water coils within 10% of design requirements.
2. Verification - Verify the type, location, final pressure drop and GPM of each coil. This information shall be recorded on coil data sheets.
For control valves:
1. Check operation of automatic valves.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 4
2. Test and record pressure drop and flow across control valves at full flow.
3.4 SOUND TESTING:
3.4.1 The TAB agency shall conduct sound testing in the following areas per AABC National Standards or NEBB Standards and to the criteria listed, using sound meter with octave band analyzer:
TEST AREA NUMBER OF ACCEPTABLE LOCATIONS NC LEVEL
General Offices 6 30-35
3.5 VIBRATION TESTING:
3.5.1 The TAB agency shall conduct testing in the following equipment per AABC National Standards (or similar NEBB Standards). Test deflection in mils and velocity in inches per second shall be measured and the results compared to requirements in equipment specification sections.
EQUIPMENT:
Air Handling Units Fans Pumps
3.6 INDOOR AIR QUALITY VERIFICATION:
3.6.1 The TAB agency shall take measurements at minimum outside air. It shall measure temperature and humidity uniformity throughout the space, check filter installation for proper fit, seal and operation and verify condensate drain operation. The TAB agency shall note any water damage or obvious contamination sources from inside or outside.
3.6.2 The TAB agency shall conduct the following air sampling tests using TWA limits shown in ASHRAE Standard 62- 1989, Table C-1:
1. Carbon dioxide 2. Carbon monoxide 3. Ozone 4. Nitrogen oxides 5. Formaldehyde
3.6.3 The TAB agency shall prepare a short report showing the results and location of each test, a summary of the HVAC operating conditions and a listing of any discrepancies.
3.7 ADDITIONAL TAB SERVICES:
3.7.1 Job Site Inspections: During construction, the TAB agency shall inspect the installation of pipe systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the HVAC systems as required.
3.7.2 Verification of HVAC Controls: The TAB agency shall be assisted by the building control systems Contractor in verifying the operation and calibration of all HVAC and temperature control systems. The following tests shall be conducted:
1. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire and freeze stats and other safety devices.
2. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating conditions.
3.7.3 Temperature Testing: To verify system control and operation, a series of three temperature tests shall be taken at approximately two hour intervals in each separately controlled zone. The resulting temperatures shall not vary more than two degrees Fahrenheit from the thermostat or control set point during the tests. Outside temperature and humidity shall also be recorded during the testing periods.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 5
3.7.4 Tab Report Verification: At the time of final inspection, the TAB agency may be required to recheck, in the presence of the owner’s representative, specific and random selections of data, air quantities, and air motion recorded in the certified report. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the owner’s representative. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as approved for the initial work for the certified report. Selections for recheck, specific plus random, will not exceed 10% of the total number tabulated in the report.
3.7.5 Building/Zone Pressurization: The TAB agency shall test and adjust building/zone pressurization by setting the design flow to meet the required flow direction and pressure differential. For positive pressure areas, it shall set the supply air to design flow and gradually reduce the exhaust air rate to obtain the required flow or pressure difference. For negative pressure areas, it shall set the supply air to design flow and gradually increase the exhaust air rate to obtain the required flow or pressure difference.
END OF SECTION
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 6
SECTION 23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL:
Refer to Section 23 05 00 for Common Work Results for HVAC.
1.2 SCOPE:
The Contractor shall cover all piping and apparatuses, as specified below, with insulation as manufactured by Manville, Owens-Corning or equal. All insulation, jacket, facing and adhesive shall have composite ratings not exceeding flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK:
All supply, return and outside air ductwork except internally lined return and outside air ductwork shall be insulated with 2" thick, three quarter pound per cubic foot minimum density glassfiber blanket insulation and have type FRK foil reinforced kraft vapor barrier jacket. Internally lined supply air ductwork shall be wrapped in addition to lined. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the ductwork with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2". Adhere insulation to metal with 4" strips of insulation bonding adhesive at 8" on centers. On longitudinal joints, the overlap shall be secured using 9/16" flared door staples applied 6" on centers and taped with minimum 3" wide foil reinforced kraft tape. All pin penetrations or punctures in facing shall be taped. Tape all circumferential joints with 4" wide foil reinforced kraft tape. Refer to Section 15890 for ductwork with internal lining.
2.2 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING:
2.2.1 Condensate drain piping from air conditioning units that runs outside of fan housing shall be insulated with 1/2" thick molded fiberglass with a "Universal" white vapor barrier jacket with flap. Furnish manufactured rigid fitting covers.
2.2.2 All piping above slab from floor drains, deep-seal p-traps, hub drains or other devices used for condensate drain termination shall be insulated with 1/2" thick molded fiberglass with a “Universal” white vapor barrier jacket with flap and manufactured rigid fitting covers.
2.3 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER PIPING (Including Valves, Flanges and Fittings):
Chilled and heating water piping within the building shall be insulated with 2" thickness dual-temp with finished jacket.
Chilled and heating water piping exterior to the building shall be insulated with 3” dual-temp with finished jacket.
2.4 ALUMINUM METAL JACKET:
All insulation outside, exposed to weather shall be covered with 0.024" aluminum metal jacket.
2.5 REMOVABLE/REUSABLE COVERS:
All valves, strainers, suction diffusers and pumps throughout the chilled water, heating water and condenser water piping systems shall be insulated with factory fabricated removable/reusable covers as manufactured by Corick. Covers shall be fabricated of 1" thick closed cell elastomeric insulation with velcro closures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROCEDURES:
3.1.1 All insulation shall be the product of reputable manufacturers and shall be applied by mechanics skilled in the use of various materials and in the employ of a concern regularly engaged in the insulating business. The materials shall all be applied in accordance with the published standards of the manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. Unsightly work shall be just cause for rejection.
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 1
3.1.2 All sectional covering shall finish round and smooth, without lumps or depressions and all end and joints shall butt evenly and tightly together and to the covered surface. No broken or damaged section shall be used. When covering is formed from blocks, they shall be carefully and evenly applied, securely wired in place and joints shall be closed with cement insulation.
3.1.3 In instances where insulated lines pass into other areas, wherein the line will not be insulated as described herein, the insulation shall not terminate at the wall, but shall extend full size a minimum of 1" beyond the wall.
3.1.4 Engage the services of a qualified insulation applicator to furnish and install all the insulation required for the mechanical equipment, piping, etc., specified herein.
3.1.5 All surfaces to be insulated shall be clean and dry before applying insulation. All sections of molded pipe covering shall be firmly butted together. No insulation shall be applied until the pipe, duct, etc., have been pressure tested and found tight. Piping flexible connections, flanges and unions shall not be covered unless specifically noted. Flexible connections on ducts shall not be covered.
3.1.6 Prior to the installation of any insulating material to ferrous piping systems, the piping surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mill scale, grease and dirt and shall be given a coat of rust inhibiting primer.
3.1.7 Refer to Section 23 05 00, for flame spread properties of insulating materials.
3.1.8 At all valves, unions, flanges, etc. insulation shall be beveled or tapered to the surface being insulated. Insulation ends shall then be sealed vapor-tight with mastic.
3.1.9 Where vapor barriers are required, the vapor barrier shall be on the outside. Extreme care shall be taken that the vapor barrier is unbroken. Joints, etc., shall all be sealed. Where insulation with a vapor barrier terminates, it shall be sealed off with the vapor barrier being tapered continuous to the surface being insulated. Ends shall not be left raw.
3.1.10 Metal jackets shall have side and end lap at least 2-inches wide with the cut edge of the side tap turned inside one inch to provide a smooth edge. Overlap the jacket not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and secure with metal bands at not more than 9-inch centers or with screws at not more than 5-inch centers. Overlap longitudinal joints down to shed water. Seal circumferential joints with a coating recommended by the insulation manufacturer for weatherproofing.
END OF SECTION
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 2
SECTION 23 09 00
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL:
A. Work Included Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating Building Control System (BCS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls (DDC) as shown on the drawings and described herein. The BCS shall perform control algorithms, calculations and all monitoring functions. The BCS shall provide operator interaction and dynamic process manipulation, including overall system supervision, coordination and control. This shall include HVAC control, metering, energy management, alarm monitoring, and all trending, reporting and maintenance management functions related to normal building operations all as indicated on the drawings or elsewhere in this specification.
B. System Description 1. General Requirements: a. Provide and install a dedicated, stand-alone automatic Direct Digital Control system complete with all required software and hardware. This system will directly control all specified mechanical equipment, including VAV boxes, fan powered boxes, heat pumps, fans, duct coils, heat recovery units, pumps, cooling towers, central chiller plant machinery, etc. b. The operator workstation shall run on a personal computer (PC) with a color monitor, mouse, keyboard, and printer. The operator workstation will allow a user to interface with the network via graphic and/or text format as described in the Product section Part 2. c. The controls contractor shall assume complete responsibility for the entire controls system as a single source. He shall certify that he has on staff under his direct employ on a daily basis, factory trained technical personnel. These employees shall be qualified to project manage, engineer, commission, and service all portions of the control system. d. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate.
2. Basic System Features: a. Zone by zone direct digital logic control of space temperature, scheduling, optimum starting, equipment alarm reporting, and override timers for after-hours usage. A zone is the area served by one VAV box, heat pump, unit ventilator, fan coil, etc. b. Operator Interface software shall be a web-browser application. The server software shall be multi-tasking, capable of executing and displaying multiple instances in individual windows while running concurrently with other Windows programs such as word processors or database programs. Operation of the terminal software shall be simple and intuitive. c. Complete energy management firmware, including self-adjusting optimum start, power demand limiting, global control strategies and logging routines for use with total control systems. All energy management firmware shall be resident in field hardware and not dependent on the Operators Terminal for operation. Operators terminal software is to be used for access to field based energy management control firmware only. d. Priority password security systems to prevent unauthorized use. Each user shall have an individual password, or users can be assigned to a group password. Each user shall be assigned which control functions they have access to. e. Equipment monitoring and alarm function including information for diagnosing equipment problems and alarm dial out to remote sites or pagers. f. The complete system, including, but not limited to zone controllers, field installed controllers and operator’s terminals shall auto-restart, without operator intervention, on resumption of power after a power failure. Database stored in field installed controller memory shall be battery backed up for a minimum of 1 year. Batteries on unitary controllers shall not be allowed. g. Modular system design of proven reliability. h. Each field panel capable of independent control. i. All software and/or firmware interface equipment for connection to WEB based remote monitoring station from field hardware or the operator’s terminal.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-1
j. The system shall be capable of recording equipment runtime totalization of fans, heaters, boilers, etc., and also capable of alarm generation and alarm dial out to remote sites. k. Communication wiring for field controllers shall not be run in star patterns. l. All DDC hardware and software shall be designed and manufactured by U.S. corporations. All hardware shall be Listed Underwriters Laboratory for Open Energy Management Equipment (PAZX) under the U.L. standard for safety 916, with integral labels showing rating.
C. Quality Assurance 1. Responsibility: The supplier of the Building Control System shall be responsible for inspection and Quality Assurance (QA) for all materials and workmanship furnished by him.
2. Component Testing: Maximum reliability shall be achieved through extensive use of high-quality, pre-tested components. The manufacturer prior to shipment shall individually test each and every controller, sensor, and all other DDC components.
3. Tools, Testing and Calibration Equipment: The Building Control System supplier shall provide all tools, testing and calibration equipment necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the control system.
4. Installer Qualification: · The installer shall be certified as a trained, approved installer by the Building Controls Systems Manufacturer. The certification shall be for the type and version of the product to be installed in this project. · The installer shall have completed the Building Control Systems Manufacturer’s classes on the control system. The installer shall present for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request. · The installer shall have a minimum of five years documented experience in Building Control Systems installations and be approved by the Manufacture or their authorized Distributors.
5. Product Qualification: · All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Engineer in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract. · All controllers shall be capable of containing and executing factory designed and tested, pre-engineered control algorithms. Factory tested algorithms shall be utilized to meet the sequence of operation (except as noted). · All products shall be available to multiple installers. The manufacturer shall have at least 3 installation and service providers within 100 mile radius. · All web-enabled controllers shall be accessible with all web browsers, i.e. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Apple Safari, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, etc. · All controllers shall integrate seamlessly with the existing i-Vu control system, without requiring the use of a translator or gateway.
D. Reference Standards 1. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of date of supplier's purchase order, and any subsections thereof as applicable, shall govern design and selection of equipment and material supplied: a. ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) Standards 135 (BACnet), 90.1 and 62.99 b. ( Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark). c. City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase order. d. Except as otherwise indicated, the system supplier shall secure and pay for all permits, inspections, and certifications required for his work and arrange for necessary approvals by the governing authorities.
E. Scheduling And Coordination
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-2
1. The vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time markings and details for hardware items and software configuration phases. 2. The schedule shall show all the target dates for transmission of project information and documents and shall indicate timing and dates for system installation, debugging, and commissioning.
F. Warranty 1. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period of one year from completion and acceptance by the owner, except for damages from other causes. 2. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-site or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours during normal business hours. 3. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software and be at no cost to the owner.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The Building Automation System (BAS), Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) supplier shall provide and install all materials, labor and services required in connection with, or properly incidental to a fully integrated Building Automation System incorporating Direct Digital Control DDC), energy management, equipment monitoring and control consisting of the following elements as necessary to satisfy the specified sequences of operation:
1. Provide microcomputer based Distributed Control Processors (DCP's) interfacing directly with sensors, actuators and environmental delivery systems (i.e., HVAC units, boilers, chillers, systems, etc.).
2. Provide a two wire peer communication network to allow data exchange from DCP to DCP and DCP's to the facility and central Building Management computer.
3. Provide seamless interface consisting of standard software from the control system manufacturer to integrate to a computer based central control system, and associated peripherals and software functioning as the primary operator interface for the BAS. Provide software and hardware for a fully integrated networked operators workstation to be located by the owner at this facility.
4. Provide electric and electronic controls for all items indicated on drawings, defined in the points list at the end of this section and described hereinafter including dampers, valves, panels and low voltage wiring.
5. The BAS/ATC contractor shall perform all programming and setup of the BAS/ATC system including but not limited to: controller setpoints, override times, control algorithms, time-of-day schedules, trend logs, alarm logs, optimum start-stop routines, night setback and set-up routines. The BAS/ATC contractor shall provide a minimum of forty (40) hours of training in eight (8) hour segments to the owner’s personnel. (Coordinate train ing events with Owner and provide Owner signed receipt for each event.)
6. The BAS/ATC systems shall be supplied and installed completely under the BAS/ATC Contract. Control components shall be mounted and wired by the BAS/ATC Contractor. The BAS/ATC contractor shall provide all wiring, conduit and wiring accessories below 120 VAC for proper installation of the control components. The BAS/ATC contractor shall coordinate with the electrical contractor to individually wire all main building control panels with surge protection devices.
7. The engineering, installation, calibration, software programming and checkout necessary for complete and fully operational BAS/ATC systems, as specified hereafter, shall be provided by the BAS/ATC Contractor.
1.3 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE
A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows:
1. BMCS Building Management and Control System 2. TCS Temperature Control System 3. NAC Network Area Controller 4. IDC Interoperable Digital Controller 5. IBC Interoperable BACnet Controller 6. GUI Graphical User Interface 7. WBI Web Browser Interface 8. POT Portable Operator’s Terminal
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-3
9. PMI Power Measurement Interface 10. DDC Direct Digital Controls 11. LAN Local Area Network 12. WAN Wide Area Network 13. OOT Object Oriented Technology 14. PICS Product Interoperability Compliance Statement
B. Provide submittals, start up, test and validation of the controls, instruction of owners representative on maintenance and operation of the controls, and as built composite electric diagrams showing interlocks between equipment furnished under this and other sections and controls furnished herein. Provide report of check out and successful commissioning of the controls with the existing BMCS.
C. The BMCS contractor shall furnish and install a complete Building Management and Control System for all mechanical systems and other facility systems as included in the project documents. The BMCS contractor shall provide a complete and operational system to perform all sequences of operation as stated or shown on the plans and specifications.
1. The work shall include all materials and labor to perform the sequences whether specifically indicated or not.
2. The drawings and specifications are complementary to one another. What is required by one is to be considered required by all. Where conflicts exist between the plans and specifications, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
D. All temperature control wiring exterior to the building and/or exposed shall be installed in rigid metal conduit. All temperature control wiring shall be installed in EMT. All wiring and conduit (120 VAC and above) in connection with the automatic temperature control system shall be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor under another section of this specification. All wiring and conduit (below 120 VAC) shall be provided by the temperature controls contractor.
1.4 DIVISION OF WORK
A. Contractor shall be responsible for all controllers (IDC and IBC), control devices, control panels, controller programming, controller programming software, controller input/output and power wiring and controller network wiring.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for the Network Area Controller(s) (NAC), software and programming of the NAC, graphical user interface software (GUI), development of all graphical screens, Web Browser pages, setup of schedules, logs and alarms, LonWorks network management and connection of the NAC to the local or wide area network.
1.5 WORK BY OTHERS:
1.5.1 Division 23: Setting in place of valves, flow meters, water pressure and differential taps, flow switches, thermal wells, dampers, and air flow stations shall be by the mechanical contractor.
1.5.2 Division 26: Power wiring to line voltage, line voltage interlocks, power for temperature control panels (DCPs), wiring to smoke and fire/smoke damper E/P switches, and setting in place of current transformers shall be by the electrical contractor in accordance with Division 26 requirements. All other low voltage control wiring shall be provided by this Section.
1.5.3 Division 23: The Chiller Manufacturer under Section 23 65 00 shall furnish all peripherals and interface equipment to provide status and accept commands (0-10vdc and digital) via BACnet IP or BACnet MS/TP as noted in the system points list for the chillers in this Section. Coordinate all requirements with this Section prior to bid.
1.5.4 Division 23: The Variable Frequency Drive Manufacturer under Sections 23 34 00 shall furnish all peripherals and interface equipment to accept speed commands (2-10vdc) ria BACnet IP or BACnet MS/TP as noted in the system points list for the equipment controlled in this Section. Coordinate all requirements with this Section prior to bid.
1.6 SUBMITTALS:
1.6.1 The following data/information shall be submitted for approval:
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-4
1. Complete sequence of operation. 2. Control system CAD generated drawings including all pertinent data to provide a functional operating system. 3. Damper schedules showing size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment. 4. Data sheets for all hardware and software control components including PC, modem and printer.
1.6.2 Failure to submit complete submittal data in accordance with the requirements of this specification shall be grounds for rejection of the submittal. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for additional requirements.
1.6.3 All submittal data including drawings shall be bound in a 3-ring, loose-leaf binder. Drawings shall be printed on sheets no larger than 11" x 17". Drawings shall be available on CD-ROM.
1.6.4 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for each control device furnished with all pertinent requirements of this specification clearly identified. Properly label and number each device cut sheet and include a table of contents with sheet numbers.
1.6.5 Shop Drawings: Submit sequence of operations and layout drawings of installed electric-electronic (DDC) temperature control system including wiring, thermostats, controllers, switches, panels and sensors, showing their relation to associated equipment and connections for signal and electrical power feeders.
1.6.6 Wiring Diagrams: Submit for approval complete wiring diagram for all temperature control systems indicating all control and interlock wiring and conductor and terminal identification.
1.6.7 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of control device and include this data in the operator's & maintenance manual.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.7.1 Installer: The system shall be installed by Division 23 and 26 as noted above and supervised by the BAS/ATC manufacturer with full responsibility for proper operation of the BAS/ATC including debugging and proper calibration of each component in the entire system. All low voltage electrical installation and labor shall be by the BAS/ATC manufacturer. The BAS/ATC Contractor shall have a service office with factory certified and trained technicians with a maximum response time (arrival on site) within one hour from a call from the owner.
1.7.2 Electrical Standards: All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of F.C.C. regulation Part 15 Section 15 governing radio frequency electromagnetic interference and be so labeled and comply with NEMA standards. The BAS/ATC shall comply with U.L. 864 and 1076 and be so listed at the time of bid. All system components are to be designed and built to be fault tolerant:
1. Satisfactory operation without damage at 10% above and 15% below rated voltage and at + 3 hertz variation in line frequency. Provide static, transient, and short circuit protection on all inputs and outputs. Communication lines shall be protected against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. Bus connected devices shall be A.C. coupled or equivalent so that any single device failure will not disrupt or halt bus communication.
2. All real time clocks and data file RAM to be battery backed for a minimum of 72 hours.
3. It must be possible to printout English language alarms at the central location even when the host computer is non-operational or taken out of service for periodic maintenance.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, where practical. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
1.9 MANUFACTURERS:
1. The installer shall only use products from the following list of acceptable manufacturers: a. Trane b. Storer
2. Other manufacturers may be accepted if submitted description meets all requirements as outlined in paragraph C. of this section.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-5
3. Alternative bidders will be accepted if 2 weeks prior to bid time they submit a complete proposal, including submittal sheets, and drawings of the proposed system. Drawings shall be specific to proposed project and include all information necessary to install the system. Alternative bidders shall also submit a compliance statement (referencing the project specifications) stating paragraph by paragraph that their system meets or does not meet requirements of each paragraph. If the proposed system does not meet requirements of a specific paragraph, bidder's proposal shall explain for each such paragraph how proposed system does not meet those requirements.
4. Owner reserves the right to reject, at his option, any and all bids that do not meet the specified requirements stated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEM:
2.1 GENERAL:
A. The BAS shall be comprised of a network area controller(s) or a central PC based software package within the building for connection as a Web Based Accessed Facility. The NAC shall connect to a local area network (LAN). Access to the system either locally in the building or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be accomplished through an integrated system or standard web browsers via the internet. Provide all interface devices, software and connections as required.
B. The use of custom built integrators or software tables unique to this project are not acceptable. If objects or points are added to this system after project completion, the owner shall not be dependent upon the manufacturer to make custom changes to the integrator or software tables to accomplish the addition of the objects or points.
C. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall BMCS.
D. The Building Automation System shall include but not be limited to the following components.
1. The Operator Interface shall consist of hardware and software that allows full user monitoring and adjustment of system parameters through a Central Host Station (CHS) PC located at the site. The facility will be provided with a CHS as an interface device.
2. All the controllers with the proper control inputs and outputs to properly sequence the equipment listed herein and scheduled.
3. All sensors, relays, controllers, dampers and ancillary devices for proper operation of the system.
Data shall automatically be shared between controllers when they are networked together.
2.2 ARCHITECTURES
A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system communicating on an open protocol communication network within the facility to a host workstation within the facility and communicating as an integrated system or Web base system via the internet to a host workstation in a remote location. The BMCS shall include all software and hardware
B. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system
C. All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall be true “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable.
D. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data through the operator interface and configuration programs, or a new web based system.
E. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall BMCS. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) encryption shall be an available option for remote access.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-6
F. The installed system must be totally scalable to allow for future expansion with the addition of controllers and/or input/output devices. It shall not be necessary to remove equipment supplied under this contract to expand the system.
G. The failure of any single component or network shall not interrupt the control functions of non-affected devices. A single network failure shall only affect shared communications or shared data; individual application controllers and network controllers shall continue normal operation minus only the data from a remote device from the affected network. Automatic default values for all network transported data shall be provided to allow continued operation until the network is restored.
H. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.
1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces. 2.3 NETWORKS
A. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be a minimum 10 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs), and user workstation.
2.4 NETWORK ACCESS:
A. Remote Access: Provide access to the LAN from a remote location, via the Internet. The owner shall provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via high speed cable modem, asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) modem, ISDN line, T1 Line or via the customer’s Intranet to a corporate server providing access to an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
2.5 DDC CONTROLLERS:
A. HVAC control shall be accomplished using DDC based controllers. All programming, documentation and programming tools necessary to set up and configure the supplied controllers per the specified sequences of operation shall be provided.
B. All control sequences within or programmed into each controller shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained.
C. Each controller shall communicate with the NAC at a baud rate of not less than 19K baud. Each controller shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the technician, without cover removal.
1. Each DDC controller shall be operational as standalone devices configured to perform the sequences specified, and with I/O selected for the application. Controllers shall be tested and listed under UL916 for Energy Management computing devices. Each controller shall be provided with a face mounted LED type annunciation to continually display its operational mode: power, normal, or in an alarm state. The controller shall have spare Inputs/Outputs for future expansion.
D. Each DDC controller shall be configured for DIN rail mounting using industry standard clip on adapters or direct panel mounted. Each controller shall be designed with on-board jacks for quick commissioning and troubleshooting with a portable programming tool. This connection shall be extended to a space temperature port where indicated and shown on plans.
E. DDC Controllers shall be standalone EEPROM based configured to perform the sequences specified, and with I/O selected for the application. Enclosures for controller shall be flame retardant compact plastic conforming to UL94-V5 for plenum mounting or plated steel.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-7
2.6 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC)
A. Contractor shall supply one or more Network Area Controllers (NAC) as part of this contract. Number of area controllers required is dependent on the type and quantity of devices provided. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate with the Division 23 and 26 contractors to determine the quantity and type of devices.
B. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface between the LAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide:
1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization 6. Integration of LonWorks controller data 7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices
C. The Network Area Controller must provide the following hardware features as a minimum:
1. One Ethernet Port - 10 Mbps 2. One RS-232 port 3. One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A 4. Battery Backup 5. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) 6. The NAC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 0 to 55o C 7. The NAC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 70o C 8. The NAC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, non- condensing
D. The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
E. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users. No special software will need to be purchased from the BMCS manufacturer for use on any PC,
F. Event Alarm Notification and actions
1. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. 2. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection, or wide-area network. 3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to: a. To alarm b. Return to normal c. To fault 4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc. 5. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node. 6. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control.
G. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.
H. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-8
1. Screen message text 2. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on: a. Day of week b. Time of day c. Recipient 3. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message 4. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s) 5. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer
I. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum):
1. Time and date 2. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.) 3. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.) 4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. 5. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
J. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose.
K. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the user.
L. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user.
M. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
N. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user.
O. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user.
P. Data Collection and Storage
1. The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this data for future use. 2. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties: a. Designating the log as interval or deviation. b. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the sample collection interval. c. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. d. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis. e. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user-defined event or action. 3. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC and the data shall be accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web Browser. 4. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard SQL statements. 5. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats: a. HTML b. XML c. Plain Text d. Comma or tab separated values 6. The NAC shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself), or remotely to a server or other NAC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a minimum: a. Archive on time of day
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-9
b. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size) c. Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores d. Provide ability to clear logs once archived
Q. AUDIT LOG
1. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide the following data:
a. Time and date b. User ID c. Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.
R. DATABASE BACKUP AND STORAGE
1. The NAC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval. 2. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in the NAC. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user- defined database save interval. 3. The NAC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is supported.
2.7 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE
A. Operating System 1. The GUI shall utilize the latest version of software available and shall run on Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0, Service Pack 4 or later. 2. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification. 3. Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features and functions: a. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures. b. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens. c. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for assignment to one a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported. d. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner. (1) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. (2) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. e. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-10
f. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of text shall be required. 4. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks, with proper password access: a. Create, delete or modify control strategies. b. Add/delete objects to the system. c. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters. d. Enable or disable control strategies. e. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer. f. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state. g. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values automatically. 5. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format. 6. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format. 7. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator. 8. Alarm Console: a. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator. b. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will supersede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms.
2.8 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS
A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™.
B. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser.
C. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface.
D. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
1. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented. 2. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the Web browser interface. 3. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-11
4. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC), without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. 5. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page. 6. User’s shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: a. Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in a graphical manner. (1) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. (2) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. b. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required. c. View logs and charts d. View and acknowledge alarms e. Setup and execute SQL queries on log and archive information 7. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator. 8. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.
2.9 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
A. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide the ability to perform system programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software package. Access to the programming functions and features of the GUI shall be through password access as assigned by the system administrator.
B. A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the creation of all applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the screen, and linking them together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future use. Graphical User Interface screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user displays is obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to provide “real-time” data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to display its current value on a user display.
C. Programming Methods 1. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a user-defined library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a graphical linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will support one-to-one, many-to- one, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc. a. Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet using fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. b. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system. c. The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during duplication.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-12
2.10 OBJECT LIBRARIES
A. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks.
B. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user- defined library.
C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an on- line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed.
D. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a minimum:
1. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary scheduling features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-off events.
E. Calendar Object. The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point-and-click” selection. This object must be “linkable” to any or all scheduling objects for effective event control.
1. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying intervals 2. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection. 3. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on the previous day’s performance. 4. Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of controlling demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of sheddable equipment is not enough to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both equipment protection and occupant comfort.
F. The library shall include control objects for the following functions.
1. Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-13
2. Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. 3. Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an “on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the “on” condition. 4. Binary Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. 5. PID Control Loop Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional with integral control, as well as proportional, integral and derivative control. 6. Comparison Object - Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 7. Math Object - Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 8. Custom Programming Objects - Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use. 9. Interlock Object - Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period. 10. Temperature Override Object - Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the capability of overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by the user. 11. Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the “contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container.
G. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to the Network Area Controller (NAC).
2.11 DDE DEVICE INTEGRATION
A. The Network Area Controller shall support the integration of device data via Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE), over the Ethernet Network. The Network Area Controller shall act as a DDE client to another software application that functions as a DDE server.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-14
B. Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface programming software, to support the integration of these devices into the BMCS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum:
1. DDE Generic AI Object 2. DDE Generic AO Object 3. DDE Generic BO Object 4. DDE Generic BI Object
2.12 OTHER CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE
A. Any automatic control dampers (O/A, R/A, etc.) not specified to be integral with other equipment. Frames shall not be less than 13-gauge galvanized steel. Blades shall not be over 8 inches wide nor less than 16-gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball-bearing or nylon with steel shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight-seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -40 to 200F.
1. All proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type as hereinafter specified and all two-position dampers shall be parallel blade types.
2. Dampers shall be sized to meet flow requirements of the application. The sheet metal contractor shall furnish and install baffles to fit the damper to duct size. Baffles shall not exceed 6".
3. Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the temperature control manufacturer shall submit leakage data for all control dampers with the temperature control submittal. Maximum leakage for dampers in excess of sixteen inches square shall be 30 CFM per square foot at static pressure of 1 inch of WC.
4. Where ultra-low leakage dampers are specified the blade edges shall be fitted with replaceable, snap-on, inflatable seals to limit damper leakage to 6 CFM per square foot for dampers in excess of sixteen inches square at 1 inch of WC.
B. Actuators: All automatically controlled devices, unless specified otherwise elsewhere, shall be provided with actuators sized to operate their appropriate loads with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and tight close-off. Actuators shall be spring return type where valves or dampers are required to fail to a safe position.
C. Control Valves: Control valves shall be 2-way pattern as shown constructed for tight shutoff and shall operate satisfactory against system pressures and differentials. Two-position valves shall be ‘line’ size. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop of 4.0 psi at rated flow (except as may be noted on the drawings). Valves with sizes up to and including 2 inches shall be “screwed” configuration and 2-1/2 inch and larger valves shall be “flanged” configuration. Valves shall be ANSI-rated to withstand the pressures and temperatures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring loaded Teflon packaging with replaceable discs. Chilled water control valves shall be two-way type except where noted on the plans, which shall be three-way type. Heating hot water valves shall be two-way type except where noted on the plans. Bypass Control Valves: Provide modified linear characteristic. Select valve coefficient so that pressure drop through fully open valve at full flow is as close as practical to, but not greater than, the design system pumping pressure differential.
D. Wall Temperature Module: Each wall module shall provide temperature indication to the digital controller, provide the capability for a software-limited set point adjustment, Mount 4'-0" AFF. Where indicated on Drawings, provide remote temperature sensor.
E. Duct Mount, Pipe Mount and Outside Air Temperature Sensors: Thermistor temperature sensors with an accuracy of ± 0.2° C. Outside air sensors shall include an integral sun shield.
F. Current Sensitive Switches: Solid state, split core current switch that operates when the current level (sensed by the internal current transformer) exceeds the adjustable trip point. Current switch to include an integral LED for indication of trip condition and a current level below trip set point.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-15
G. Temperature Control Panels: Furnish temperature control panels of code gauge steel with locking doors for mounting all devices as shown. Control panels shall meet all requirements of Title 24, California Administrative Code. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates identifying all devices mounted on the face of control panels. A complete set of ‘as-built’ control drawings (relating to the controls within the panel) shall be furnished within each control panel.
H. Safety low limit shall be manual reset twenty foot limited fill type responsive to the coolest section of its length.
I. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished and connected to the building fire alarm under Division 26.
2.13 AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION:
A. Provide airflow/temperature measurement devices in the outside air ductwork to each Air Handling Unit (5 total), equal to EBTRON, Inc. model GT-Gold Server or KURZ Instruments K-Bar Series.
B. The measurement device shall consist of one or more sensor probe assemblies and a single, remotely mounted, microprocessor-based transmitter. Each sensor probe assembly shall contain one or more independently wired sensor housings. The airflow and temperature readings calculated for each sensor housing shall be equally weighted and averaged by the transmitter prior to output. Pitot tubes and arrays are not acceptable. Vortex shedding flow meters are not acceptable.
C. All Sensor Probe Assemblies 1. Each sensor housing shall be manufactured of a U.L. listed engineered thermoplastic. 2. Each sensor housing shall utilize two hermetically sealed, bead-in-glass thermistor probes to determine airflow rate and ambient temperature. 3. Each sensor housing shall be calibrated at a minimum of 16 airflow rates and have an accuracy of +/-2% of reading over the entire operating airflow range. Each sensor housing shall be calibrated to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). a.). Devices whose accuracy is the combined accuracy of the transmitter and sensor probes must demonstrate that the total accuracy meets the performance requirements of this specification throughout the measurement range. 4. The operating temperature range for the sensor probe assembly shall be -20° F to 160° F. The operating humidity range for the sensor probe assembly shall be 0-99% RH (non- condensing). 5. Each temperature sensor shall be calibrated at a minimum of 3 temperatures and have an accuracy of +/-0.15° F over the entire operating temperature range. Each temperature sensor shall be calibrated to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 6. Each sensor probe assembly shall have an integral, U.L. listed, plenum rated cable and terminal plug for connection to the remotely mounted transmitter. All terminal plug interconnecting pins shall be gold plated. 7. Each sensor assembly shall not require matching to the transmitter in the field. 8. A single manufacturer shall provide both the airflow/temperature measuring probe(s) and transmitter at a given measurement location.
D. Duct and Plenum Sensor Probe Assemblies 1. Sensor housings shall be mounted in an extruded, gold anodized, 6063 aluminum tube probe assembly. Thermistor probes shall be mounted in sensor housings using a waterproof marine grade epoxy resin. All wires within the aluminum tube shall be Kynar coated.
2. The number of sensor housings provided for each location shall be as follows: a). Area (sq.ft.) Sensors <2 4 2 to <4 6 4 to <8 8 8 to <16 12 >=16 16 3. Probe assembly mounting brackets shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. Probe
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-16
assemblies shall be mounted using one of the following options: a.) Insertion mounted through the side or top of the duct b.) Internally mounted inside the duct or plenum c.) Standoff mounted inside the plenum 4. The operating airflow range shall be 0 to 5,000 FPM unless otherwise indicated on the plans.
E. Transmitters 1. The transmitter shall have a 16 character alpha-numeric display capable of displaying airflow, temperature, system status, configuration settings and diagnostics. Configuration settings and diagnostics shall be accessed through a pushbutton interface on the main circuit board. Airflow shall be field configurable to be displayed as a velocity or a volumetric rate. 2. The transmitter shall be capable of independently monitoring and averaging up to 16 individual airflow and temperature readings. The transmitter shall be capable of displaying the airflow and temperature readings of individual sensors on the LCD display. 3. The transmitter shall have a power switch and operate on 24 VAC (isolation not required). The transmitter shall use a switching power supply fused and protected from transients and power surges. 4. All interconnecting pins, headers and connections on the main circuit board, option cards and cable receptacles shall be gold plated. 5. The operating temperature range for the transmitter shall be -20° F to 120° F. The transmitter shall be protected from weather and water. 6. The transmitter shall be capable of communicating with the host controls using one of the following interface options: a. Linear analog output signal: Field selectable, fuse protected and isolated, 0- 10VDC and 4-20mA (4-wire) b. RS-485: Field selectable BACnet-MS/TP, ModBus-RTU and Johnson Controls N2 Bus c. 10 Base-T Ethernet: Field selectable BACnet Ethernet, BACnet-IP, ModBus-TCP and TCP/IP d. LonWorks Free Topology 7. The transmitter shall have an infra-red interface capable of downloading individual sensor airflow and temperature data or uploading transmitter configuration data to a handheld PDA (Palm or Microsoft Pocket PC operating systems).
F. The measuring device shall be UL listed as an entire assembly.
G. The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall review and approve placement and operating airflow rates for each measurement location indicated on the plans. A written report shall be submitted to the consulting mechanical engineer if any measurement locations do not meet the manufacturer’s placement requirements.
H. Each airflow measuring station shall be interfaced with the BMCS for monitoring and control. The location of stations shall meet manufacturer’s guidelines. 2.14 FIELD DEVICES:
2.14.1 Airflow measuring stations not scheduled on the drawings or elsewhere in the specifications and required to accomplish the specified control sequence shall be furnished under this section but installed under the sheet metal section. Each airflow measuring station shall measure airflow by means of a network of static and total pressure sensors factory positioned and connected in parallel to produce an averaged velocity pressure. The measured velocity pressure converted to airflow (cfm) shall have an accuracy within 2% of the full scale throughout the velocity range from 700 to 4,000 fpm when measured under ideal laboratory conditions. The location of stations shall meet manufacturer's guidelines. The maximum resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.6 times the velocity head. The unit shall be suitable to withstand temperatures up to 250 oF. Airflow measuring stations shall be of heavy gauge metal construction, and shall be furnished with an air straightening section, if applicable, with an open face area of not less than 97%.
2.14.2 Dampers. The temperature control contractor shall provide all automatic control dampers not integral to the air handling units. Frames shall not be less than l3 gauge galvanized steel. Blades shall not be over 8 inches wide nor less than l6 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite or nylon with l/2" shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight-seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -40 to 200 F. All
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-17
proportional control dampers shall be opposed blade type as hereinafter specified and all two-position dampers shall be parallel blade types. Smoke dampers and combination fire smoke dampers shall be provided by Division 15.
2.14.2.1 Dampers shall be sized to meet flow requirements of the application. The sheet metal contractor shall furnish and install baffles to fit the damper to duct size. Baffles shall not exceed 6". Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the temperature control manufacturer shall submit leakage data for all control dampers with the temperature control submittal. Maximum leakage shall be less than 3 cfm/square foot at 1.0 in w.g. when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.
2.14.3 Automatic control valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, and valves 4" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be ANSI-rated to withstand the pressures and temperatures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring loaded teflon packing with replaceable discs.
2.14.3.1 All modulating straight-through water valves shall be provided with equal-percentage contoured throttling plugs. Valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi.
2.14.3.2 Unitary valves shall be straight-through or three way type as specified in the sequence of operation. Stems shall be polished stainless-steel and packing shall be ethylene-propylene suitable for both chilled water and 250 degree hot water service. Pressure ratings shall be as required for the intended service.
2.14.4 DDC Actuators. All automatically controlled devices, unless specified otherwise elsewhere, shall be provided with DDC actuators sized to operate their appropriate loads with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and tight closeoff. Where two or more actuators are to be operated in sequence with each other, sequencing shall be by digital sequencing with separate analog outputs, as specified in the sequence of operation.
2.14.5 Safeties and switches. All electric switch devices shall be selected for the applied load and UL listed for the application.
2.14.5.1 Firestats. Provide in each air moving device such as air conditioning units, ventilation fans, exhaust fans, etc. of 600 CFM capacity and larger, a firestat to stop each respective air moving device upon an entering air temperature to the fan in excess of 125°F (or in excess of that specified in the local codes or by the authority having jurisdiction). Firestats shall be adjustable with a temperature range of 125°F to 200°F.
2.14.5.2 Freezestats Controls Contractor shall furnish all low temperature detection thermostats. Thermostats for detection of low temperature in a duct system shall be of the electric type, with manual reset and 20 foot sensing element. The thermostat shall react to a temperature drop below setpoint acting upon any 1 foot section of the sensing element. Provide the quantity of freezestats required to fully cover the face of the coil to be protected.
2.14.5.3 Static Pressure Safety High Limits:
Static pressure high limit safety shall be manual reset type. High limit safety shall be interlocked to stop the AHU fan motor when the static pressure exceeds its setpoint.
2.14.6 Duct Smoke Detectors. Provided by Division 26 and installed by the mechanical contractor.
2.14.7 Electronic Data Input and Output Devices
2.14.7.1 Input/output sensors and devices shall be closely matched to the requirements of the DCP for accurate, responsive, noise free signal input/output. Control input response shall be high sensitivity and matched to the loop gain requirements for precise and responsive control. In no case shall computer inputs be derived from pneumatic sensors. In no case shall thermocouples or thermistors be used.
2.14.7.2 Temperature sensors. Shall be Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) type of 500 ohm balco, 100 or 3000 ohm platinum. Space temperature sensors shall be provided with blank cover and resemble terminal unit thermostats. Duct temperature sensors shall be rigid stem or averaging type as specified in the sequence of operation. Water sensors shall be provided with a separable copper, monel or stainless steel well. Outside air wall mounted sensors shall be provided with a sun shield.
2.14.7.3 Relative humidity sensors. Shall be capacitance type with 10% to 90% range. Duct mounted humidity sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber. Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with covers identical to temperature sensors.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-18
2.14.7.4 Differential and Static Pressure Sensors and Switches.
2.14.7.4.1 Fan proof-of-flow switches shall be U.L. listed series 700 solid-state current sensor with adjustable setpoint as specified in the sequence of operation or data point summary.
2.14.7.4.2 Air flow and static pressure analog sensors shall be high accuracy suitable for the low velocity pressures to be encountered, be selected for approximately 50% overrange, and have a 4 to 20 ma output. These differential pressure sensors shall be connected to the air flow measuring station with valved lines for testing and calibration, and shall have adjustments for zero and span.
2.14.7.4.3 Water flow analog sensors shall be provided complete with flow element and shall be an all solid state precision industrial type with stainless steel meter body, maximum error of no more than .5% of span, and 4 to 20 ma output. Sensor shall be rated for 250 psi minimum and installed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's instructions complete with valve manifold for calibration and maintenance.
2.14.8 Control relays and analog output transducers shall be compatible with the DCP output signals. Relays shall be suitable for the loads encountered. Analog output transducers shall be designed for precision closed loop control with pneumatic repeatability no greater than 1-1/2 percent.
2.14.9 Provide float switch for all units requiring auxiliary drain pans (i.e. all horizontal units mounted above ceiling). Float switch shall stop the fan (and close chilled water valve) upon sensing water in auxiliary drain pan. Float switch shall be equal to Madison Model N8700, 24 volt DC, 30 watts.
2.15 MISCELLANEOUS:
Control relays and analog output transducers shall be compatible with the DCP output signals. Relays shall be suitable for the loads encountered. Analog output transducers shall be designed for precision closed loop control with repeatability no greater than 1-1/2 percent.
2.16 CENTRAL SYSTEM:
2.16.1 All points listed on the associated points list in this section shall be programmed for graphical display and command.
2.16.2 Data to be displayed shall be in logical group format. That is, any set of randomly selected points regardless of physical hardware address, communication channel, or point type (temperature, humidity, fire, etc.) may be assigned as a logical group for display or printout. Logical groups are to be on-line programmable and under password control. Points may be assignable to multiple logical groups. Logical groups shall also contain calculated or pseudo points. Data segregation is to be provided for control of specific data routed to a terminal, to an operator assigned to a terminal, or to a given output device such as a printer.
2.16.3 Definable segregation groups shall be provided. "Segregation groups" shall be randomly selectable such as, all fire points, fire points second floor, all space temperature points, HVAC points, command points, etc. Points shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups. Display and/or output of data to printer or CHS shall occur where there is a match of operator or peripheral segregation group assignment and the point segregations. Alarms shall be displayed and printed at each peripheral to which segregation allows but only those operators having proper authorization level will be allowed to acknowledge alarms. Operators and peripherals shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups and all assignments are to be on-line programmable and under password control.
2.17 PANELS:
All static pressure control and flow control equipment shall be mounted in a prewired and tested control panel with a system static pressure gauge on the front for the static pressure control system. Provide a control air main pressure gauge on the front of the panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY:
3.1.1 General: Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing-in drawings and details on drawings. Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-19
3.1.2 All wiring and tubing shall be properly supported and run in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with Division 26. All wiring and tubing exposed and in equipment rooms shall run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure. All piping and wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled, harnessed, and anchored to prevent obstruction to devices and terminals.
3.1.3 All electrical installation required for a fully functional system, other than all line voltage wiring, not shown on the electrical plans or required by the electrical specifications shall be provided under this Section. All wiring shall be in accordance to all local and national codes. All wiring exposed and all wiring in equipment rooms shall be installed in conduit in accordance to the electrical specifications. All electronic wiring shall be #18 AWG minimum THHN and shielded if required. All low voltage wiring may be in plenum rated cable and may be run above push-up ceilings, inside panels and other approved, accessible, unexposed areas.
3.1.4 Number-code or color code conductors, excluding those used for local individual room controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system.
3.1.5 Unit-Mounted Equipment: Where control devices are indicated to be unit mounted, ship electronic controllers to unit manufacturer for mounting and wiring at factory. Cost of mounting and wiring to be by unit manufacturer.
3.2 SERVICE AND WARRANTY:
3.2.1 Final Checkout: After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors and similar equipment provided as work of this section. Final adjustment shall be performed by the temperature controls contractor. Certify that control system is installed, adjusted, calibrated, and placed in operation in accordance with the Engineer's and/or Owner's requirements and manufacturer's recommendations. Provide a two-season check.Provide the Owner with a complete instruction manual, which will include as-built documents, covering the function and operation of all control components on the project.
3.2.2 Owner's Instructions: Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8-hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the BAS/ATC system installed in this project and shall include, but not be limited to, the DDC control theories utilized, thorough discussion of as-built documents, systems' sequence of operations, and O&M Manuals. Schedule this instruction with Owner and provide at least a 5-day notice to the Engineer of the training dates.
3.2.3 Warranty: The control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If within 12 months from date of acceptance by the Owners any of the equipment herein described is proved to be defective in workmanship or material, then it shall be replaced or repaired free of any charge to the Owner.
PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
4.1 HEATING WATER BOILER:
Provide a DDC temperature control system for the heating water supply system. The boiler shall be provided with operating, safety and monitoring controls by the boiler manufacturer as described in the boiler specification. In no case shall the BAS defeat the operating safeties provided by the boiler manufacturer. The BAS shall monitor the boiler for status and common alarm. The heating water plant shall be enabled and disabled by the BAS based on outside air temperature or by system operators. The boiler shall be sequenced based on system load calculated by differential temperature and flow. The boiler operating controls shall control boiler firing, staging, etc. to control heating water supply temperature and be reset based on outside air temperature or by system operators. Interlock boiler with its associated heating water pump and system flow switches to preclude enabling the boiler without positive flow. The heating water pumps shall alternate operation at system start-up or at designated times to balance run time on each unit.
4.2 AIR COOLED CHILLER CONTROL:
Chilled Water Control. The chiller shall be provided with operating, safety and monitoring controls by the chiller manufacturer as described in the chiller specification. The chiller manufacturer shall provide all interface equipment to receive analog reset (0-10 or 2-10 VDC) and digital enable commands and transmit digital status and alarm information to the DCP as identified in the points list. In no case shall the BAS defeat the operating safeties provided by the chiller manufacturer. The BAS shall monitor each chiller for status and common alarm. The chiller plant shall be enabled and disabled by the DCP based on an owner defined time schedule or by the night setback temperature sensors. The chiller shall be sequenced based on system load calculated by differential temperature and flow. The chiller chilled water discharge temperature shall be capable of reset based on outside air dry-bulb temperature or by system operators. Interlock chiller with chilled water pumps and system flow switch to preclude enabling the chiller without positive flow.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-20
The chilled water pumps shall alternate operation at system start-up or at designated times to balance run time on each unit. The BAS controls shall allow operation of any chilled water pump.
4.3 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU-1, 2):
Provide a complete DDC temperature control system for each air handling unit. The AHU shall stop and start upon a signal from its controller based on time-of-day as modified by its optimum start/stop program. Provide a proportioning two-way or three-way valve as indicated on the chilled water coil controlled from an averaging type leaving air sensor which shall maintain a leaving air temperature of 55°F (adj.). Provide a complete DDC static pressure control system with PID. The sensors shall be averaging type with one pickup for each 36 square inches of duct area, and shall be located approximately 2/3 of the distance down the ductwork. Where multiple ducts split into several long stretches of ductwork, a static pressure signal from each duct shall be analyzed to control the static pressure. The DDC controller shall maintain constant static pressure by varying the fan speed through a variable frequency drive and will cause the fan to start unloaded and gradually load to static pressure. Each air handling unit system will be provided with a set of outside air and return air dampers. These dampers shall not be linked and shall have separate actuators. The outside air dampers shall open to an adjustable initial minimum position when the fan is started, and the outside air dampers shall close and return dampers open when the unit fan is off. Provide a flow control system, which measures outside air flow, to maintain minimum outside air required to the spaces by modulating the outside air and return air dampers independent of fan speed. The AHU shall shut down upon activation of its low temperature limit (manually reset), duct smoke detector alarm, signal from fire alarm system, or high duct static pressure limit (manually reset). The unit shall cycle during the unoccupied period based on the night cycle and night purge programs aforementioned. During the unoccupied period, the unit shall enable and operate as if in the occupied period for an owner designated period of time when the override button on one of its respective terminal unit's thermostat is pushed. The override button will illuminate when an override signal is active. The unit will operate to satisfy the override space thermostat within the limits of the above strategy.
4.4 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL
A. The BMS shall perform the following VAV terminal unit control strategies: 1. Grouping: The BMS shall be able to group VAV boxes via keyboard commands. These groups shall make it possible for the operator to send a common command to all boxes in a group to operate in the same mode. BMS shall also compile on a group basis, the following: · Minimum group temperature · Maximum group temperature · Average group temperature · Current airflow through boxes in group (total)
2. Setpoint Control: The BMS shall edit the zone space temperature setpoint of each VAV box. The zone temperature setpoint shall be operator adjustable. Individual zone setpoint and control logic shall reside at the zone level and not be dependent upon the BMS for control. In the event of communication loss, the box will continue to control to current setpoints.
3. Cooling Valve Control: The BMS shall control the cooling air valve to a fully open, fully closed, maximum CFM, or minimum CFM positions based on operator commands. The operator shall also have the capability to adjust the maximum and minimum airflow limits of the air valve through the BMS.
4. Operating Mode: The BMS shall place the box in either the occupied or unoccupied mode based on an operator adjustable time schedule. Separate heating and cooling setpoints shall be enterable for each mode through the BMS. Other modes available for special applications shall include full open, full closed, maximum flow, and minimum flow.
5. Control Offset: The BMS shall be capable of offsetting the cooling or heating setpoints of one or more groups of boxes by an operator adjustable amount. This capability will allow for automatic zone setpoint changes based on system requirements, such as demand limiting.
6 Automatic Recalibration: The system shall automatically recalibrate its air flow sensing and air valve position measurement system at system startup and on a scheduled basis.
7. Remote Setpoint Adjustment: The BMS zone temperature setpoint programmed in software shall be capable of being manually overridden by a remote adjustment at the temperature sensor. This manual readjustment feature may be disabled through the BMS, if desired.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-21
8. Override Button: The VAV shall be capable of being placed in the “occupied” mode by pressing an override button mounted on the zone temperature sensor. Associated rooftop HVAC system must also automatically index to the correct operating mode at this request.
9. Portable Interface Device: The VAV box shall be capable of communicating with a hand held portable operator’s terminal. This portable terminal shall give the operator the capability to interrogate and edit D.D. C.-VAV box parameters.
10. Terminal Unit Status Reports: For each terminal unit, the BMS shall provide an operating status summary of all unit sensed values (zone temperature, CFM, etc.), setpoints, and modes.
11. Terminal Unit Group Report: For each group of VAV terminal units, the BMS shall report the group mode, heating and cooling airflow, average zone temperature, minimum zone temperature, and maximum zone temperature. The report shall also display for each terminal unit in the group the present temperature control setpoints and the current zone temperature.
B. Terminal Box Diagnostics:
1. If zone temperature sensor input fails above its high range, unit shall control at its maximum CFM setpoint. If sensor fails below its low range, unit shall control to its minimum CFM setpoint.
2. In both cases, all heat outputs shall be disabled. A diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry.
3. If flow measuring system fails, unit shall automatically convert to a pressure dependent, damper position-based algorithm. Diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry.
4. If zone temperature setpoint potentiometer on zone sensor fails, unit shall automatically control to 74 degrees Fahrenheit. Diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry.
5. If communications are lost, controller shall continue to operate in the current mode of operation. All setpoints shall be retained in nonvolatile memory. If communications are not restored within fifteen (15) minutes, unit shall automatically initiate a reset-recalibrate.
D. VAV Box with Heating Water Control:
1. Occupied Mode: Upon a rise in space temperature above cooling setpoint, the terminal unit shall modulate to provide maximum cooling CFM. A drop in space temperature will result in the unit modulating to provide its minimum cooling CFM. As the space temperature continues to fall, the heating water valve will modulate open.
2. Unoccupied Mode: During the unoccupied mode, the primary air valve shall modulate fully open. The heating coil shall be off.
4.5 CENTRAL CONTROL:
Provide software and programming required for the central BMCS control to command and graphically monitor the points listed in the sequence of operations and on the points list for all equipment.
4.6 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT CONTROL
A. Smoke Damper and Combination Smoke / Fire Damper Control a. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor as shown on drawings and shall be integrated into the building’s fire alarm system by the Electrical Contractor. b. Whenever a smoke detector is activated a signal shall be sent from the fire alarm system to the BMS system indicating the alarm condition. Upon receiving the signal from the fire alarm system the BMS system shall provide the following sequence of operation: 1. Turn off associated RTU/AHU. Close outdoor air dampers, open return air dampers.
4.7 MECHANICAL PLANT:
The applicable controllers shall start each of the air handling units, the pumps on the pump schedule, and enable the chillers and boilers. Positive feedback shall be provided for the operation of pumps and fans by means of a solid-state status switch to alarm whenever the equipment is not responding to a command to run.
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-22
4.8 SYSTEM POINTS LIST:
Abbreviations: (CSR) = solid state current sensing relay
4.8.1 AHUs (1, 2):
Outside Air Damper (CSR) Outside Air CFM Return Air Damper (CSR) Return Air Temp Sensor Mixed Air Temperature Low Temperature Limit - Manual Reset Filter Status Cooling Coil Valve (CSR) Supply Fan Start/Stop Supply Fan Status (Current sensing relay) Supply Fan VFD Control Signal Supply Air Temp Sensor Supply Air High Static Limit Supply Air Duct Smoke Detector Status Supply Air Duct Static Pressure Sensor Return Air Duct Smoke Detector Status
4.8.2 AHU (3):
Outside Air Damper (CSR) Outside Air CFM Return Air Damper (CSR) 1&2 Return Air Temp Sensor 1&2 Mixed Air Temperature Low Temperature Limit - Manual Reset Filter Status Cooling Coil Valve (CSR) Supply Fan Start/Stop Supply Fan Status (Current sensing relay) Supply Air Duct Smoke Detector Status Supply Air Duct Static Pressure Sensor Return Air Duct Smoke Detector Status Zone 1 through 5 Supply Air Temperature Air Mixing Damper Hot Deck Temperature Cold Deck Temperature
4.8.3 AHUs (4, 5):
Outside Air Damper (CSR) Outside Air CFM Return Air Damper (CSR) Return Air Temp Sensor Mixed Air Temperature Low Temperature Limit - Manual Reset Filter Status Cooling Coil Valve (CSR) Supply Fan Start/Stop Supply Fan Status (Current sensing relay) Supply Fan VFD Control Signal Supply Air Temp Sensor Supply Air High Static Limit Supply Air Duct Smoke Detector Status Supply Air Duct Static Pressure Sensor Return Air Duct Smoke Detector Status
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-23
4.8.4 VAV Terminal Units, each
Damper Actuator (CSR) Discharge CFM Minimum CFM Maximum CFM Heating Water Valve Air Flow Sensor Space Temp Sensor, Set Point Adjust & Override Terminal Unit Discharge Temperature
4.8.5 Heating Water Boiler (B-1)
Enable/Disable Signal Status Signal Common Alarm Signal Outside Air Temperature Heating Water Supply Temperature Heating Water Return Temperature Heating Water Secondary Flow Rate Heating Water Pump Start/Stop (2) Heating Water Pump Status (CSR) (2)
4.8.6 Air Cooled Chiller: (CH-1)
Enable/disable Signal Control Status Signal Common Alarm Signal Discharge Temperature Reset Chilled Water Supply and Return Temp Chilled Water Secondary Flow Rate Chilled Water Pump Start/Stop (2) Chilled Water Pump Status (CSR)(2) Chilled Water Supply Valve
END OF SECTION
HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 23 09 00-24 SECTION 23 34 00
HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL:
Refer to Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC.
1.2 SCOPE:
Furnish and install all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services and perform all operations required in connection with, or properly incidental to, the construction of complete air conditioning equipment systems as indicated on the drawings, reasonably implied therefrom or as specified herein unless specifically excluded.
1.3 SCHEDULES ON DRAWINGS:
In general, all capacities of equipment and motor and starter characteristics are shown on schedules on the drawings. Reference shall be made to the schedules for such information. The capacities shown are minimum capacities. Variations in the characteristics will be permitted only on written approval of the Architect. Insofar as is possible, all items of the same type (i.e. air handling units, rooftop units, fans, etc.) shall be by the same manufacturer. Where instructions on installation are not included on these specifications or on the plans, the manufacturer's instructions shall be followed. Equipment shall be labeled and provided with installation and operating instructions in accordance with International Mechanical Code.
1.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND WARRANTY SCHEDULE:
1.4.1 This Subcontractor shall refer to the architectural specifications for the required time schedule for the installation of equipment furnished as a part of this contract. The required time schedule will necessitate the setting-in-place of some items before the normal period of occupancy of the space and before the acceptance of substantial completion and subsequent approval by the Owner and Architect. The Subcontractor is advised that the warranty for each item of equipment will not begin until the documented time of beneficial use as defined in the architectural specifications, and the Subcontractor will, therefore, make the necessary arrangements with the equipment manufacturers for extended warranties as may be required.
1.5 EFFICIENCY:
Unless a higher efficiency is schedule on the plans, all equipment shall comply with the efficiency requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (latest edition) as a minimum. Efficiency requirements shall satisfy both the heating and cooling requirements where applicable.
1.6 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications (latest edition) ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Systems & Equipment (latest edition) ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals (latest edition) Standard for Installation of Air-Conditioning & Ventilating Systems - NFPA 90A International Mechanical Code – ICC (latest edition) Reference SECTION 23 05 00 for additional information Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings – ASHRAE Standard 90.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FILTERS:
2.1.1 To protect the air-moving equipment during construction and for the purpose of testing and balancing, this Contractor shall furnish and install a complete set of temporary filters. These temporary filters shall be of glass fiber in heavy cardboard frame with suitable retainers to hold the media in place. Provide two (2) complete sets of each type of filter for each piece of air moving equipment, in addition to “start-up” filters. Provide Architect documentation, signed by the Owner, that these additional filters have been turned over to the Owner.
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-1 2.1.2 All permanent pre-filters for the air moving equipment shall be 2" thick Farr 30/30 30% efficient pleated throw-away filters.
2.1.3 All final filters shall be 12" thick Farr Riga-Flo 200 90% efficient cartridge type filters. A differential "Magnahelic" pressure gauge registering 0" to 5.0" shall be installed across the filters.
2.2 MOTOR STARTERS:
2.2.1 Starters shall be NEMA approved magnetic, line voltage type with overload relays in each phase, phase loss protection and phase unbalance protection. Each starter will be provided with pilot light on H-O-A switch.
2.2.2 Interlocks as required, plus one (1) spare, shall be provided for each starter. Holding coils shall be 120V AC from an individual control power transformer.
2.2.3 Motor starters shall be provided for all motors 1 HP and above, unless indicated otherwise on the plans.
2.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD):
2.3.1 Description: Provide as described herein VFD which convert fixed frequency utility power into adjustable frequency power necessary to operate three phase AC motors at variable speed. This shall allow proportional variation in volume in volume flow of the air handling units that are variable volume or constant pressure systems. VFD shall incorporate microprocessor logic to ease user set up for application functions.
2.3.2 Service conditions: The VFD shall operate satisfactorily in the following conditions:
1. Operating ambient temperature - 10° to 40° C 2. Storage temperature - 20° - 60° C 3. Relative humidity to 90% noncondensing 4. Vibration 1 G max under 20 Hz; 0.2 G at 20 to 60 Hz
2.3.3 Enclosure:
1. Standard: The VFD and the BYPASS PANEL and all peripheral equipment required for proper operation of the VFD's shall be provided in NEMA 1 wall mount enclosures, one per VFD. 2. Weatherproof: For VFD's mounted on exterior equipment (exhaust fans, etc.), the VFD and the BYPASS PANEL and all peripheral equipment required for proper operation of the VFD's shall be provided in NEMA 3R wall mounted enclosures, one per VFD.
2.3.4 Electro-mechanical construction shall be as described below:
1. Input voltage: As scheduled on the ELECTRICAL drawings. 2. Output current overload rating of 125% of motor FLA for 1 minute. 3. Voltage source design using PWM inverter technology. 4. Microprocessor based control circuit generating sine coded PWM output current waveform. 5. Non-volatile memory (NV RAM); all programming is maintained when disconnected from power. 6. Corrects displacement power factor to 98% throughout the motor speed range and eliminates power line notching, through the use of diode bridge input section or power factor correction capacitors and isolation transformer. 7. Input phase insensitive, sequencing of the 3 phase input lines is not required. 8. Capable of single phase input operation - required 50% drive derating and three phase motor on the output. 9. Fused DC bus with capacitive filtering. 10. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) output, allowing motor noise, at 60 Hz, less than 2 dB (@ 1 meter) above that resulting from across the line operation. In the event that the VFD manufacturer does not utilize IGBT technology they shall provide output reactors in each VFD to reduce noise. 11. Three current transformers detect the output current to provide: Electronic thermal overload protection, Three phase current limit, Ground fault protection, Short circuit protection and Speed search capability. As an alternate the VFD manufacturer must provide isolation transformer, external motor overload and external logic to accomplish speed search must be provided. 12. Digital operator keypad and display provides local control and readout functions -or- provide individual meters for readout and PLC for terminal status indication: a. Run/Stop/Jog commands. b. Speed command.
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-2 c. Reset command. d. Output frequency meter and speed command meter, which can be programmed for other speed related indications including, RPM, CFM, FPM and % max. RPM. e. Volt meter, Amp meter, Kilowatt meter functions. f. Input and output terminal status indication. g. Diagnostic indication.
2.3.5 Performance features - All VFD's furnished shall meet the performance standards described herein:
1. The VFD shall provide output frequency and voltage modulation with selectable volts/hertz ratio for optimum variable torque output. a. Output frequency from 0 to 400 Hz. b. Output voltage from 0 to motor rated voltage. 2. Fixed carrier frequency programmable up to 15 KHz, allowing motor noise, at 60 Hz, less than 2 dB (@ 1 meter) above that resulting from across the line operation -or- output reactor must be provided to reduce noise. 3. Compatible with standard NEMA B motors. 4. UL listed and CSA approved. 5. Lock out reverse operation. 6. Drive defaults to 80% of last speed through internallogic -or- provide a PLC to accomplish this function. 7. Soft start, linear or S-curve function. 8. Ramp to stop or coast to stop selection. 9. Provide braking through DC injection with voltage level, current limit and duration adjustable, and selectable for either stop (deceleration braking) or braking before start (anti-windmill braking) -or- provide a mechanical brake and time delay relay to accomplish. 10. Critical frequency rejection capability in 3 ranges with adjustable span o f0 to 10 Hz to avoid possible vibration problems at driven equipment resonant frequencies -or- provide a PLC to accomplish this function. 11. Two (2) second momentary power loss ride thru (drive logic is maintained) -or- provide external capacitors or battery backup to accomplish this function. 12. Auto restart (up to 10 attempts) -or- provide a PLC to monitor fault condition and accomplish restart. The auto restart for the equipment on this project shall be set at the time of start-up to five (5) attempts at starting prior to a lockout situation occurring. a. The VFD shall have the ability to start into free running (coasting) motor via speed search feature. 13. High starting torque capability for high inertia loads. 14. Full range auto torque boost for high inertia loads. 15. Stall prevention. 16. Standard frequency reference (speed) input signals; 0-10 Vdc, 4-20 mA. 17. Accepts reverse or direct acting frequency reference input signal. 18. Programmable bias and gain for frequency reference input signal. 19. External fault input (i.e. firestat or freezestat) programmable to command ramp to stop, coast to stop, emergency stop or continue operation -or- provide external relays to accomplish this function. 20. Speed search to start a rotating motor and load -or- provide external logic to accomplish safe restart. 21. Terminals and programming for remote run/stop and speed reference. 22. Remote operation run/stop, 2 wire or 3 wire control. 23. Local/remote operation input via contact closure. 24. Analog output (0 to10 Vdc) proportional to frequency or current. 25. RUN/FAULT OUTPUT CONTACTS (1 amp resistive) selectively activated at initial fault occurrence or after final auto restart attempt. 26. Stall prevention by reducing output voltage and frequency during momentary overload. Automatically resume normal operation when overload occurs. 27. Digital diagnostic indication and protection for: a. DC bus undervoltage and overvoltage. b. Load over torque. c. Fuse blown. d. Motor overload. e. Heatsink over temperature. f. Instantaneous over current. g. Operator error. h. Central processor fault. i. External fault. j. Dynamic braking fault.
2.3.6 Adjustments and programmability:
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-3 1. Incremental/Floating Point Control a. One contact closure input causes acceleration for duration of the closure, another causes deceleration. When both switches are open the last speed command is held. 2. Factory default settings formost common HVAC applications. These settings can be easily re-established through a reset code. 3. Program security code. 4. Thirty (30) operational changes possible in control and display functions without stopping the drive including: a. Acceleration and deceleration time. b. Frequency command. c. Frequency command bias and gain. d. Multi-step speed references. e. Jog reference. f. Monitor display. 5. Two independent, selectable acceleration/deceleration ramp times. 6. Acceleration time from 0.1 to 6000 seconds. 7. Deceleration time from 0.1 to 6000 seconds. 8. Maximum and minimum output frequency form 0 to 400 Hz. 9. Programmable upper and lower frequency limits. 10. Pre-set selectable Volts/Hertz (V/Hz) patterns plus 1 custom pattern. 11. Auto speed reference (instrument follower) input signal adjustable for bias and gain. 12. Programmable start and stop ramp time. 13. Four programmable multi-function input terminals. 14. Multi-function output contacts programmable for: Run mode Zero speed detect Overtorque detect Coast to stop detect Run reference mode Speed reference mode Output frequency detect Speed synchronization Low voltage detect Operation ready Speed reference missing Braking resistor fault Drive fault Firestat/freezestat 15. Adjustable torque and current limit from 0 to 170%. 16. Ramp to stop or coast to stop selection. 17. Adjustable upper and lower frequency limits independent of pre-set V/Hz pattern. 18. Programmable lock out code, to prevent operator access to parameter settings. 19. Nine (9) selectable pre-set speed programming capability. 20. Programmable jog speed.
2.3.7 Components - Furnished with all VFD's
A. Input section - VFD power input stage converts three phase AC line power into a fixed DC voltage via a solid state full wave diode rectifier with metal oxide varistor (MOV) protection.
B. Intermediate section - DC bus maintains a fixed DC voltage with filtering and short circuit protection as a DC supply to the VFD output section. It is interfaced with the VFD diagnostic logic circuit to continuously monitor and protect power components.
C. Output section - Insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT) convert DC bus voltage to variable frequency and voltage PWM sine coded output to the motor.
2.3.8 Accessories
A. Bypass control allows operation of the motor across the line should the VFD require service:
1. Bypass and drive are factory assembled and electrically interlocked. 2. VFD can be removed with bypass control left in place. 3. NEMA 1 enclosure. 4. DOOR INTERLOCKED DISCONNECT. 5. VFD input contactor. 6. BFD output contactor. 7. Bypass contactor. 8. Overload relay. 9. 115 VAC control transformer. 10. Safety circuit terminal strip.
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-4 11. Drive-Off-Line selector. 12. Power on light. 13. VFD select light. 14. Line select light. 15. Normal-Test selector. 16. Hand-Off-Automatic switch.
B. A Factory certified VFD technician shall provide START-UP SUPERVISION AND PROGRAMMING of the VFD's for proper operation. This work shall not be performed by the installing contractor. The factory certified VFD technician shall provide operator training to the building's operations personnel.
C. The UNIT MANUFACTURER shall provide one (1) year parts and LABOR warranty. This warranty shall not be provided by the installing contractor. The labor warranty shall include mileage and subsistence to and from the jobsite. No additional costs shall be incurred by the owner during the period of the warranty.
2.3.9 Source quality control
A. Mean time between failure (MTBF) 100,000 hours minimum.
B. In-circuit testing of all printed circuit boards.
C. Printed circuit boards burned in for 96 hours at 85 C.
D. Functional testing of printed circuit boards after burn in.
E. Fully assembled VFD tested with induction motors.
F. All integrated circuits tested to .5% AQL acceptance criteria.
2.3.10 Drives schedule
A. Rated input voltage as scheduled on the ELECTRICAL prints.
B. Variable torque horsepower - as scheduled for the air handling units.
C. Maximum continuous output current shall be the FLA of the motors.
2.3.11 Approved Manufacturers: MagneTek, Cutler Hammer, Allen Bradley.
2.4 END SUCTION BASE MOUNTED PUMPS:
2.4.1 Provide pumps as indicated, with capacities as scheduled on drawings, complete ready for piping and electrical connections.
2.4.2 Pumps shall be back pull-out vertical split case, end suction, horizontal flexible coupled, base mounted configuration with case wear rings.
2.4.3 Construction shall be cast iron case, bronze fitted, frame mounted on a common base with monitor. Flexible coupling shall be Woods spacer type for rear pull-out, and shall have a guard. Suction and discharge connections shall be drilled and tapped for gauges.
2.4.4 Shafts shall be carbon steel. Seals shall be equal to John Crane for the intended use as recommended by pump manufacturer.
2.4.5 Bearings shall be grease lubricated ball bearings selected for 200,000 hours average, type B-10 life. If bearings fail under contractor warranty for any circumstances supplier shall replace at no charge.
2.4.6 Drip pan with drain connection shall be sloped and provided for chilled water service. Extend 1/2" type "L" hard drawn copper line to floor drain. Drip pan shall extend a minimum of 3" around pump base.
2.4.7 Motor shall meet NEMA standards for application, shall be high efficiency TEFC and shall not overload nameplate HP at any point on pump performance load and system curve.
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-5
2.4.8 Impellor diameter shall not exceed 85% of cutwater diameter maximum. Contractor shall submit cutwater dimensions with submittal data. Select operation point at or to the left of best effective point. Impellor design shall accommodate field wear ring installation.
2.4.9 Submittal data shall include, but not be limited to, single-line pump curve with trimmed impellor and catalog curve for comparison.
2.4.10 Provide two nameplates, one to be mounted on pump and one to be mounted on base with the following minimum requirements:
A. Manufacturer B. Serial Number C. Model/Type D. Size E. GPM F. T.D.H. G. RPM H. HP I. Impellor trim diameter J. Provide example of nameplate with submittal
2.4.11 Provide suction diffuser with disposable start-up strainer and permanent removable strainer.
2.4.12 Acceptable manufacturers: Peerless, Aurora, Bell & Gossett.
2.5 SEMI-INSTANTANEOUS PACKAGED GAS FIRED BOILER:
2.5.1 Furnish and install a boiler plant as specified and as scheduled on the plans. The boiler plant shall consist of hydronic boiler module. Each Boiler shall be UL Listed, CSD-1 approved; ASME coded and stamped, and incorporate a gas train designed in accordance with FM. Boiler shall have capacities as shown on the plans, when fired with natural gas. The Boiler manufacturer must publish known part load value efficiencies; the thermal efficiency must increase as the firing rate decreases. The boiler control panel shall incorporate the functions of temperature control, combustion safeguard control, message annunciation, and fault diagnostic display, on individual field replaceable circuit boards mounted within a single housing. Each boiler shall have a footprint of no more than 30" W, 40" L, 80" H with a UL Listing for zero side wall clearance. Each boiler shall have ASME approved relief valve.
2.5.2 Boiler modules shall be natural gas fired, condensing design with a modulating forced draft power burner and positive pressure vent discharge.
2.5.3 Modulating Air/Fuel Valve and Burner
The Boiler burner shall be capable of a 20 to 1 turndown ratio of the firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency or staging of gas valves. The burner shall be nozzle mix design, with spark ignition and flame rectification. The burner head shall be cast stainless steel. All burner material exposed to the combustion zone shall be of stainless steel construction. There shall be no moving parts within the burner itself. The modulating air/fuel valve shall meter the air and natural gas input. The modulating motor must be linked to both the gas valve body and air valve body with a single linkage. The linkage shall not require any field adjustment and shall be located within the boiler cabinet.
2.5.4 Pressure Vessel/Heat Exchanger
A. The boiler shall be capable of handling return water temperatures down to 40o F without any failure due to thermal shock or fireside condensation. The heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than 150 psig. The pressure vessel for 1000 MBH input boilers shall have a maximum water volume of 30 gallons. The boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed psig at 80 gpm. The boiler water connections shall be 2.5" flanged 150 lb. ANSI rated. The pressure vessel shall be constructed of SA53 carbon steel, with a 0.25-inch thick wall and 0.50-inch thick upper head. Inspection openings in the pressure vessel shall be in accordance with ASME Section IV pressure vessel code. For other boiler sizes see the plan schedule.
B. The boiler shall be designed such that the thermal efficiency increases as the boiler firing rate decreases. The heat exchanger shall be constructed of a minimum 316L stainless steel tubes and tube sheets with a one-pass combustion gas flow design. The tubes shall be no less than 0.065-inch wall thickness. The upper and lower stainless steel tube sheet shall be no less than 0.313 inch thick. The pressure vessel/heat exchanger shall be
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-6
welded construction. The heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than 150 psig. Access to the tube sheets and heat exchanger shall be available by burner and exhaust manifold removal. Minimum access opening shall be no less than 6 inch diameter.
2.5.5 The exhaust manifold shall be of corrosion resistant porcelainized cast iron with flue connection. The exhaust manifold shall have a gravity drain for the elimination of the condensation with collecting reservoir.
2.5.6 Boiler Controls:
A. The boiler control system shall be segregated into three components: Control Panel, Power Box, and Input/Output Connection Box. The entire system shall be Underwriters Laboratories Recognized. B. The control panel shall consist of 6 individual circuit boards utilizing surface-mount technology, in a single enclosure. These circuit boards shall be defined as follows: display board incorporating LED display to read temperature, and a VFD display module for all message annunciation; CPU board which houses all control functions; electric low water cutoff board with test and manual reset functions; power supply board; ignition/stepper board incorporating flame safeguard control; and connector board. Each board shall be individually field replaceable. The combustion safeguard/flame monitoring system shall utilize spark ignition and a rectification type flame sensor. The control panel hardware shall support both RS-232 and RS-485 remote communications. The controls shall annunciate boiler & sensor status and include extensive self- diagnostic capabilities that incorporate a minimum of 8 separate status messages and 34 separate fault messages. C. The control panel shall incorporate three self-governing features designed to enhance operation in modes where it receives an external control signal by eliminating nuisance faults due to over-temperature, improper external signal or loss of external signal. These features are: Setpoint High Limit, Setpoint Low Limit, and Failsafe Mode. Setpoint High Limit allows for a selectable maximum boiler outlet temperature and acts as temperature limiting governor. It is a PID function that automatically limits firing rate to maintain outlet temperature within a 0 to 10 degree selectable band from the desired maximum boiler outlet temperature. Setpoint Low Limit allows for a selectable minimum operating temperature. D. Failsafe Mode allows the boiler to switch its mode to operate from an internal setpoint if its external control signal is lost, rather than shut off. This is a selectable mode; hence the control can be set to shut off the unit upon loss of external signal if so desired. E. The boiler control system shall incorporate the following additional features for enhanced external system interface: system start temperature feature; pump delay timer; auxiliary start delay timer; auxiliary temperature sensor; MA output feature which allows for simple monitoring of either temperature setpoint, outlet temperature, or fire rate; remote interlock circuit; delayed interlock circuit; and fault relay for simple remote fault alarm. F. Each boiler shall utilize an electric single seated safety shutoff valve with proof of closure switch in its gas train and incorporate dual over-temperature protection with manual reset in accordance with ASME Section IV and CSD-1.
2.5.7 Temperature Control Mode
A. The boiler shall operate in the following control mode: Indoor/Outdoor-Reset with the manufacturer furnished (BMS) boiler management system remote panel. The panel can be field reconfigured to offer internal setpoint, or 4 to 20 mA temperature setpoint. The following is a description of I-O-R and the BMS.
B. Indoor/Outdoor Reset: 1. Boiler shall include integral factory wired operating controls to control all operating and energy input of the boiler plant. The system shall be comprised of a microprocessor-based control utilizing pulse width modulation for bumpless transfer of header temperature. The controller shall have the ability to vary boiler input throughout its full range to maximize the condensing capability of the boiler and without header temperature swings.
2. The boiler shall operate to vary header temperature setpoint on an inverse ratio in response to outdoor temperature to control discharge temperature +2°F. Unit shall operate with an Inverse Efficiency Curve, with known Part Load Value Efficiencies. Maximum efficiency shall be achieved at minimum firing input. Reset ratio shall be fully field adjustable from 0.3 to 3.0 in operation. The boiler shall have LCD display for monitoring of all sensors and interlocks. Outdoor controller conduit and wiring furnished by Boiler Supplier.
C. Boiler Management System (BMS): 1. The boiler Manufacturer shall supply as part of the boiler package a completely integrated Boiler Management System Programmer to control all operation and energy input of the boiler. The
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-7
Boiler Management System shall be comprised of a microprocessor based control utilizing a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal to communicate with the boiler. The BMS controller shall have the ability to operate up to 8 boilers per BMS panel.
2. The controller shall have the ability to vary the firing rate and energy input of each individual boiler throughout its full modulating range to maximize the condensing capability and thermal efficiency output of the entire heating plant. The BMS shall control the boiler outlet header temperature within +2°F. The controller shall be a PID type controller for accurate temperature control with excellent variable load response. The BMS controller shall provide contact closure for auxiliary equipment such as system pumps and combustion air inlet dampers based upon outdoor air temperature.
3. When set on Internal Setpoint Mode, temperature control setpoint on the BMS shall be fully field adjustable for 50°F to 200°F in operation. When set on Indoor/Outdoor Reset mode, the BMS will operate on an adjustable inverse ratio in response to outdoor temperature to control the main header temperature. Reset ratio shall be fully field adjustable from 0.3 to 3.0 in operation. When set on 4ma to 20ma Temperature Control Mode, the BMS will operate the plant to vary header temperature setpoint linearly as an externally applied 4-20 ma signal is supplied. The BMS controller shall have a LCD display for monitoring of all sensors and interlocks. Nonvolatile memory backup of all control parameters shall be internally provided as standard. The controller will automatically balance the sequence of operating time to each module by a first-on first-off mode and provide for setback and remote alarm contacts. Connection between central BMS system and individual modules shall be twisted pair low voltage wiring, with the boilers 'daisy- chained' for ease of installation. This conduit and wiring will be provided by the Boiler Supplier.
2.5.8 Accessories and Installation:
A. All aspects of installation of Boiler Plant shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. The vent system must conform to all manufacturers’ recommendations and shall utilize UL listed stainless steel AL-29-4C Positive Pressure materials in a double wall configuration. This stack shall be supplied by the Boiler Supplier.
C. Boiler plant piping shall be field constructed of materials as specified. Boiler shall have individually isolating shutoff valves for service and maintenance. Boiler shall require a minimum gas pressure of 7" W.C. at input SCFH. Boiler shall be provided with an individual supply gas regulator for proper gas regulation with a 2" NPT connection. Each boiler shall be supplied with an (field installed in discharge piping) automatic, pressure compensating, flow control valve of 4" size with maximum flow as scheduled on plans. Flow cartridges shall be field changeable for future GPM modifications and shall be constructed of stainless steel. The system Header temperature Sensor complete with sensor well shall be furnished with the boiler and field installed in the discharge header at the location directed by the manufacturer. Wiring and conduit shall be supplied by the boiler supplier.
2.5.9 Warranty
The pressure vessel/heat exchanger of the boiler shall carry a 7 year prorated, limited warranty against failure due to condensate corrosion, thermal stress, mechanical defects or workmanship. The six individual circuit boards of the control panel assembly shall carry a 2-year warranty against failure due to defective materials of workmanship. All other parts shall carry a 1-year parts warranty. In addition, a 1-year labor warranty including trouble-shooting shall be provided by the authorized factory service company. This service company shall have a service office located within 150 miles of the project site. A Warranty Certificate must be issued to the owner from the manufacturer and a copy of warranty must be submitted for engineer’s approval.
2.5.10 Field Service
Contractor shall provide the services of a local factory authorized representative to supervise all phases of equipment startup. All control wiring between Boilers, Header Temperature Sensor and the Boiler Management System shall be the responsibility of the boiler manufacturer Field Services. It shall comply with the Electrical and control wiring specifications. A copy of the startup papers with factory operation, installation and maintenance instructions shall be submitted at the completion of startup.
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-8
2.5.11 Acceptable Manufacturers:
AERCO International Viessmann Manufacturing Company
2.6 HEAT TAPE:
2.6.1 Furnish and install a complete UL listed system of heaters, components, controls to prevent above grade outdoor chilled water piping from freezing.
2.6.2 The self-regulating heater shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG tinned-copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self- regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the heater to be cut to length in the field. The heater shall be covered by a radiation cross-linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. To provide a ground path and to enhance the heater's ruggedness, the heater shall have a braid of tinned-copper and an outer jacket fluoropolymer as required per section 427-23 of the NEC-1996. For installation on plastic piping, the heater shall be applied using aluminum tape (AT 180).
2.6.3 The heater shall have a self-regulating factor of at least 90 percent. The self-regulation factor shall be defined as the percentage reduction, without thermostatic control, of the heater output going from 40°F pipe temperature operation to 150°F pipe temperature operation.
2.6.4 The heater shall operate on line voltages of 277 volts without the use of transformers.
2.6.5 The heater shall be sized according to this table. The required heater output rating is in watts per foot at 50°F.
Minimum Ambient Temperatures Pipe Size -10°F -20°F 3 inch or less 5 watt 5 watt 4 inch 5 watt 5 watt 6 inch 8 watt 8 watt 8 inch 2 strips - 5 watt 2 strips - 8 watt 12 inch to 14 inch 2 strips - 8 watt 2 strips - 8 watt
2.6.6 Acceptable manufacturers: Raychem Corporation, Deltatherm or prior approved equal.
2.6.7 All heating cable components shall be UL-listed for use as part of the system to provide pipe freeze protection. Components enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X to prevent water ingress and corrosion. Installation shall require only standard hand tools and shall not require the installing contractor to cut into the heating cable core to expose the bus wires. Connection systems requiring the installing contractor strip the bus wires, or which used crimps or terminal blocks, shall not be acceptable. All components that make an electrical connection shall be reenterable for servicing.
2.6.8 Heating cable circuit shall be protected by a ground fault device for equipment protection in accordance with section 427-22 of the NEC-1996.
2.6.9 Provide the following master control:
a. Thermostatic Control-Ambient Sensing: The system shall be controlled by an ambient sensing thermostat set at 40°F either directly or through an appropriate contactor.
2.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT:
2.7.1 Provide complete water treatment systems for each of the following: a. Chilled Water Piping System b. Heating Water Piping System
2.7.2 Qualifications - The water treatment chemical and service supplier shall be a recognized specialist whose major business is in the field of water treatment. The supplier shall have been active in the field of industrial water treatment for at least ten years and shall have a fully staffed laboratory, development facility, service department, and full-time service personnel.
2.7.3 Chemicals: - Provide, at no additional cost to the owner, all chemicals required for treating and testing included water systems for one year of operation.
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-9
2.7.4 Water Analysis - The appropriate chemicals to be used will be determined by the analysis of a water sample taken from the building site by the water treatment supplier. Provide ingredients necessary to achieve the desired water conditions.
2.7.5 Instructions - Instruct owner's personnel in the use and operation of each water treatment system, including: monitoring equipment, feed equipment, preparation of chemical solutions, charging of the chemical solution reservoirs, proper handling of chemicals, and proper use of test kits, charts and logs.
2.7.6 Testing Equipment and Reagents - Furnish water test equipment and reagents in appropriate cases to verify control parameters.
2.7.7 Manufacturers - Design is based on products by Garratt - Callahan Chemical Company. Equal equipment by GESCO, Betz, or Culligan is acceptable.
2.7.8 Closed loop hydronic piping systems:
A. Provide equipment of the appropriate size, and type scheduled below, as manufactured by Garratt-Callahan Chemical Company. B. Shot Feeders: Provide chemical feeders of the by-pass or shot type for each separate hydronic system. Feeders shall be five gallon capacity complete with bottom drain, 3/4" NPT inlet and outlet valves. Fill cap shall be 3-1/2" (minimum) located on top with non-slide, quick opening fitting of ductile iron with Buna-N O-ring. Pressure Rating: 200 psig. Maximum temperature rating: 212°F. C. Pretreatment: All piping chemicals and related equipment shall be thoroughly flushed out with cleaning chemicals designed to remove deposits from construction, such as: pipe dope, oils and loose mill scale. Reference Section 15055.
D. Chemicals: Provide chemicals and dye indicator for the control of scale formation, corrosion, and algae based on water analysis of the system make up water. The chemical shall be provided in sufficient quantities for one year of corrosion inhibitor.
2.8 FAN COIL UNITS:
2.8.1 Provide horizontal, ductless, non-concealed fan coil units of the style and capacities indicated on the plans and in the equipment schedules.
2.8.2 Base units shall be complete with chilled water coil, heating water coil, centrifugal fan with PSC motors, 3-speed switch, condensate drain pan, and 18-gauge galvanized steel casing.
2.8.3 Coil shall have 1/2" O.D. copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded with 5/8" O.D. male sweat fittings.
2.8.4 Coils shall be leak tested at 350 psig minimum air pressure and shall be suitable for working pressures up to 250 psig. Coils shall have a manual air vent (automatic if specified).
2.8.5 Drain pan shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel, completely coated with fire retardant closed cell foam insulation. Drain connection shall be 7/8" O.D. male sweat fitting.
2.8.6 Motors shall be 3-speed permanent split capacitor type with built-in thermal overload.
2.8.7 Fans shall be centrifugal forward curved type statically and dynamically balanced. Fan wheels and housings shall be galvanized steel.
2.8.8 One inch throwaway filters shall be provided.
2.8.9 Accessory items: Room thermostat, fan speed control, auxiliary electric heat when scheduled.
2.8.10 Acceptable manufacturers: Trane or McQuay.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HEAT TAPE:
3.1.1 Heat Tape Installation:
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-10
A. Apply the heater linearly on the pipe after piping has been successfully pressure tested. Secure the heater to piping with cable ties or fiberglass tape. B. Apply "electric traced" signs to the outside of the thermal insulation on 20'-0" centers.
3.1.2 Testing
After installation and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject heater to testing using a 2500 VDC megger. Minimum insulation resistance shall be 20 megaohms regardless of length.
END OF SECTION
HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 34 00-11
SECTION 23 65 00
AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Chiller package. B. Charge of refrigerant and oil. C. Controls and control connections. D. Chilled water connections. E. Starters. F. Electrical power connections.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 23 05 03 - Piping Systems. B. Section 23 09 00 - Temperature Controls. C. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections.
1.3 REFERENCES:
A. ANSI/ARI 590 - Positive Displacement Compressor Water - Chilling Packages. B. ANSI/ARI 550 - Centrifugal or Rotary Water - Chilling Packages. C. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. D. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. E. ANSI/ASME SEC 8 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code F. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. G. ANSI/UL 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners. H. ANSI/UL 984 - Safety Standard for Hermetic Motor Compressors. I. ANSI/AFBMA 9-1978 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. Bearings must have life of not less than 200,000 hours. J. ASTM B117 - Standard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testin K. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products L. ASTM A525 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Sheet Steel Products M. ASTM D1654 - Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens, Subjected to Corrosive Environments
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
1.4.1 Submit drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate accessories where required for complete system. Catalog pages are not acceptable.
1.4.2 Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:
1.5.1 Submit SIX (6) copies of operation and maintenance data.
1.5.2 Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, controls, and accessories.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
1.6.1 Conform to ANSI/ARI 590 Standard for testing and rating of Positive Displacement Compressor Water - Chilling Packages or conform to ANSI/ARI 550 Standard for testing and rating of Centrifugal and Rotary Screw Water - Chilling Packages.
1.6.2 Conform to ANSI/U.L. 465 code for construction of water chillers and provide U.L. label. In the event the unit is not U.L. approved, the manufacturer shall, at his expense, provide for a field inspection by an U.L. representative to verify conformance to U.L. standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the unit to comply with U.L., as directed by the U.L. representative.
AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 65 00 - 1
1.6.3 Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 8 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for construction and testing of water chillers.
1.6.4 Conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15 code for construction and operation of water chillers.
1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
1.7.1 Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units, to be performed by the successful contractor.
1.7.2 Protect units from physical damage. Factory coil shipping covers shall be kept in place until installation.
1.7.3 Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 203°F (95°C) storage temperatures in the control compartment for an indefinite period of time.
1.8 START-UP SUPERVISION AND WARRANTY:
1.8.1 The manufacturer shall provide start-up supervision and operator training of the air cooled chiller. The contractor shall verify that all required electrical, controls and piping is properly connected and operational. The manufacturer shall clearly state in his bid that the start-up supervision and training will be performed by a factory trained representative, not sales personnel.
1.8.2 The manufacturer shall provide one (1) year parts, labor and refrigerant warranty for the entire machine. This warranty shall not be provided by the mechanical contractor. The manufacturer shall state on his submittal and installation, operation and maintenance manuals that this warranty is provided by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall provide a five (5) year replacement compressor warranty for all compressors on each circuit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUMMARY:
2.1.1 The manufacturer shall furnish, for installation by the successful contractor an air-cooled water chiller utilizing scroll compressors, low sound fans and hydronic pump system as scheduled on the contract documents. The chiller shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.
2.1.2 Approved Manufacturers: York, Daikin, Trane
2.1.3 Substitution: Any manufacturer desiring to furnish equipment on this project shall submit COMPLETE submittal data fourteen (14) days prior to the bid date. Catalog cut sheets and sales data are not acceptable. The unit manufacturer shall list all deviations from the specified unit. Any manufacturer allowed to bid this project will be listed herein or by addenda. Listing herein or by addenda does not relieve the contractor from providing equipment which meets both the letter and the intent of these documents. Only those manufacturers listed herein or by addenda will be considered as viable suppliers on this project.
2.2 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION:
Furnish and install factory assembled and tested outdoor air-cooled liquid chiller consisting of scroll compressors, condenser, evaporator, electronic expansion valve, R-410a or R-134a refrigerant, refrigeration accessories, hydronic pump package, starter, and control panel. Construction and ratings shall be in accordance with ANSI/ARI 550 or ANSI/ARI 590.
2.3 COMPRESSORS:
2.3.1 Fully hermatic scroll type compressors, direct drive.
2.3.2 Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts.
2.3.3 Provide oil lubrication system with oil charging valve and oil filter to ensure adequate lubrication during starting, stopping, and normal operation.
Provide direct drive constant speed 3500 rpm compressor motor, suction gas cooled with solid state sensor and electronic winding overheating protection, designed for across-the-line or star delta starting. Furnish with starter. Compressor motor power factor shall be 0.90 or greater.
AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 65 00 - 2
2.3.4 Provide crankcase heater to evaporate refrigerant returning to crankcase during shut down. Energize heater when compressor is not operating.
2.3.5 Provide rubber in-shear external vibration isolation.
2.3.6 All compressors shall be furnished with sound attenuation kits which enclose the compressor with a loaded vinyl enclosure – no exceptions. Attenuation shall provide a maximum overall sound pressure level of 70 dBA.
2.4 EVAPORATOR:
2.4.1 Provide shell and tube type, direct expansion evaporator, seamless or welded steel construction with cast iron or fabricated steel heads, seamless internally enhanced copper tubes, roller expanded into tube sheets.
2.4.2 Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for 445 psig working pressure and water side for300 psig working pressure, in accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 8.
2.4.3 Insulate with 0.75 inch minimum thick PVC foam closed cell insulation with maximum K value of 0.28. Provide heat tape to protect evaporator to -20°F. The electrical contractor shall provide a separate 115 volt service to operate the heat tape, separate from the control power circuit.
2.4.4 Provide water drain connection, vent and fittings for factory installed leaving water temperature control and low temperature cutout sensors.
2.4.5 Water connections shall be Victaulic. Evaporator shall have only one entering and one leaving connection.
2.4.6 Design shall incorporate a minimum of 2 independent direct-expansion refrigerant circuits.
2.5 CONDENSER AND FANS:
2.5.1 Construct condenser coils of aluminum alloy fins. Air test under water to 650 psig.
2.5.2 Provide vertical discharge direct driven, 9-blade airfoil reinforced polymer cross-section, fans with fan guard on discharge, tubes and manifolds with a corrosion-resistant coating. Entire fan assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan guard shall be coated steel wire. Condenser fans shall be low noise type for reduced fan noise.
2.5.3 Provide factory mounted access guards that cover both the condenser coils and the service area beneath the condenser coils.
2.5.4 Provide fan motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings and built-in thermal overload protection.
2.5.5 The manufacturer shall provide low ambient control such that the chiller will properly operate at ambient conditions to fifteen (15) degrees fahrenheit. Low ambient control shall be accomplished with variable speed control of the condenser fans or outlet dampers on the fan discharge. Low ambient control shall be accomplished without the use of baffles on the condenser coils. Any manufacturer that has a standard ambient operation of above fifteen (15) degrees fahrenheit shall provide low ambient controls, factory installed.
2.6 ENCLOSURES:
2.6.1 House components in heavy gauge, painted, galvanized steel frame and mounted on welded structural steel base. Hot-dip galvanized steel frame coating shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) recognized as G90-U, UL guide number DTHW2. Provide fully louvered panels and/or hail guards with birdscreens to completely enclose the entire unit.
2.6.2 Unit panels, and control panels shall be finished with a baked on powder paint. Control panel doors shall have door stays.
2.6.3 Mount starters in weatherproof panel provided with full opening access doors. The starter shall be provided with a single point power connection for main power with a molded case non-fused disconnect switch factory installed, if disconnect switch is not shown on the electrical prints.
2.6.4 Casings fabricated from steel that do not have a Zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 123 or ASTM A525 shall be treated for the prevention of corrosion with a factory coating or paint system.
AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 65 00 - 3
2.7 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT:
2.7.1 All units shall have 2 refrigeration circuits.
2.7.2 Provide for each refrigerant circuit:
1. Liquid line shutoff valve. 2. Filter dryer replaceable core type. 3. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator. 4. Electronic expansion valve sized for maximum operating pressure. 5. Charging valve. 6. Discharge and oil line check valves. 7. Compressor suction and discharge service valves. 8. High side pressure relief valve. 9. Full operating charge of refrigerant and oil. 10. Unit factory leak tested at 300 psig.
2.7.3 Capacity Modulation: Provide capacity modulation by either slide valve or unloader valves. Unit shall be capable of operation down to 10%. In the event a manufacturer can not provide unit with modulation down to 10% hot gas bypass must be provided and factory installed. The manufacturer shall clearly state the minimum operating percentage on his submittal data submitted with his bid.
2.8 CONTROLS:
2.8.1 On chiller, mount weatherproof control panel, containing starters, power and control wiring, molded case disconnect switch (U.L. approved) with external lockable operator handle, unless disconnect is shown to be provided by the electrical contractor on the electrical prints. Provide dual power connections. Provide primary and secondary fused control power transformer and a single 115 volt single phase connection for evaporator heat tape.
2.8.2 For each compressor, provide across-the-line starter on 460V applications. The chiller shall be provided with one (1) electrical power connection, for main power.
2.8.3 Provide the following safety controls with indicating lights or diagnostic readouts at the chiller microprocessor panel. Each item listed below shall have either an indicating light associated with it or a readout via a LCD display.
1. Low chilled water temperature protection. 2. High refrigerant pressure. 3. Low oil flow protection. 4. Loss of chilled water flow. 5. Contact for remote emergency shut-down. 6. Loss of refrigerant charge protection. 7. Motor current overload. 8. Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing. 9. Over/under voltage. 10. Failure of water temperature sensor used by controller. 11. Compressor status (on or off).
2.8.4 Provide the following operating parameters displayed at the microprocessor display panel on each chiller:
1. Active chilled water setpoint. 2. Chilled water supply temperature. 3. Chilled water return temperature. 4. Evaporator refrigerant temperature or pressure. 5. Condenser refrigerant temperature or pressure. 6. Compressor running hours and starts. 7. Percent RLA for each compressor.
2.8.5 Provide the following operating controls:
1. Eight (8) or more step leaving chilled water temperature controller which cycles compressors and slide valve based on PI algorithms. If manufacturer is unable to provide unloading to 10% of full load, hot gas bypass shall be provided and installed by the manufacturer.
AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 65 00 - 4
2. Five minute solid state anti-recycle timer to prevent compressor from short cycling. If a greater than 5 minute solid state anti recycle timer is provided, hot gas bypass shall be provided to insure accurate temperature control in light load applications.
3. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature to prevent nuisance tripouts.
4. Low ambient controls for operation down to 15°F or lower.
5. High ambient unloader pressure stat that unloads compressors to keep head pressure under control and help prevent high pressure nuisance tripouts on days when outside ambient is above design.
6. Compressor current sensing unloader unit that unloads compressors to help prevent current overload nuisance tripouts.
7. Auto lead-lag functions that constantly evens out running hours and compressor starts automatically. If manufacturer can not provide this function then cycle counter and hour meter shall be provided for each compressor so owner can be instructed by the contractor on how to manually change lead-lag on compressors and even out compressor starts and running hours.
8. Condenser fan sequencing which automatically cycles fans in response to ambient, condensing pressure and expansion valve pressure differential thereby optimizing unit efficiency.
2.8.6 Provide pre-piped gauge board with pressure gauges for suction and discharge refrigerant pressures or digital display of pressures on microprocessor.
2.8.7 Provide ammeters for each compressor or digital display of % RLA on microprocessor.
2.8.8 Provide factory installed compressor cycle counters and unit hour meters.
2.8.9 The control panel shall be provided with a building automation system interface to allow chilled water temperature setpoint via a 4-20 mA signal or a 0-10 VDC signal. Additionally, the control panel shall accept a 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal for limiting the current delivered to the machine.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
3.1.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.2 Connect to electrical service. One (1) - 480 volt service is required for the main power and one (1) - 115 volt service for the heat tape and one (1) - 115 volt service for the control power. The contractor shall verify the scheduled electrical connection of the chiller with that shown on the electrical prints. Report any discrepancy to the engineer.
3.1.3 Connect to the existing chilled water piping at the existing isolation valves.
3.1.4 Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning.
3.2 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES:
3.2.1 Supply service of factory trained representative for a period of one (1) day to supervise testing, start-up, and instruction on operation and maintenance to Owner. The start-up supervision shall be provided by the manufacturer. The chiller manufacturer’s start-up personnel shall coordinate with the building automation system supplier to make sure the systems chiller and control system will properly operate.
3.2.2 The chiller manufacturer and building automation system contractor shall coordinate the operation and installation of the component and software prior to the bid date. There will be no change orders for lack of proper coordination of the system between the contractors, manufacturer and building automation system supplier. If the parties mentioned above are unable or unwilling to properly install and operate the system they shall not bid the project.
END OF SECTION
AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 65 00 - 5
SECTION 23 73 00
INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
Packaged Air Handling Units.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.2.1 Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues complete catalog data on total product offering.
1.2.2 Constant Volume Air Handling Units: Certify air volume, static pressure, fan speed, brake horsepower and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 430. All air handling units must be certified through ARI Standard 430. Any costs incurred to adjust fans to meet scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
1.2.3 Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410-87.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
1.3.1 Submit as-built drawings and product data under the General Conditions of these contract documents and as specified herein. As-built drawings shall show total unit configuration in direction of airflow, unit dimensions, and field duct connection details.
1.3.2 Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, coil performance, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, filter media, filter sizes, and filter quantities.
1.3.3 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under the General Conditions of these contract documents and as specified herein.
1.3.4 Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. Fan curves shall indicate air volume, static pressure, fan speed and brake horsepower.
1.3.5 Submit sound power levels by octave band for air handling units at scheduled design conditions. Provide sound power levels for "discharge" and "inlet plus cabinet" sound paths in accordance with AMCA 300 and AMCA 301. If unit sound power levels exceed values of the scheduled units on drawings, contractor shall submit detailed plan outlining steps to meet design noise levels.
1.3.6 The contractor shall provide a 1/2” scale drawing of the mechanical equipment rooms where all air handling units will be located. The drawing shall show all piping, equipment and recommended clearances for the equipment. This drawing shall be furnished prior to commencement of work.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
1.4.1 Deliver products to site under the General Conditions of these contract documents and as specified herein. Units shall ship fully assembled up to practical shipping and rigging limitations. Units not shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate location and orientation in direction of airflow. Each section shall have lifting lugs or shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement of section.
1.4.2 Deliver units to site with fan motors, sheaves, and belts completely assembled and mounted in units. Mount motors as specified herein.
1.4.3 Store and protect products under the General Conditions of these contract documents and as specified herein.
1.4.4 Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units with Coils 23 73 00 -1
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
· Trane · Daikin
2.1.1 Substitutions: Any manufacturer desiring to furnish equipment for this project, who is not listed above shall provide complete submittal data as outlined above, fourteen (14) days prior to the bid date. Sales literature and general catalog data will not be acceptable. If a manufacturer is deemed acceptable to bid, the name/model number of that manufacturer will be listed by addendum. If the manufacturer is not listed herein or by addendum they will not be acceptable. Additionally, listing herein or by addendum does not alleviate the contractor from furnishing equipment which meets the letter and the intent of this specification.
2.2 GENERAL:
2.2.1 Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for expenses that occur due to exceptions made.
2.2.2 Fabricate draw-thru type air handling units with fan sections, coil sections, access sections, mixing boxes, filter sections as shown on the plans.
2.2.3 Factory fabricate air handling units of sizes, capacities, and configurations as scheduled on drawings.
2.2.4 Provide factory installed base rails/mounting legs to support all sections of units, if a concrete housekeeping pad is not shown. Construct base rails/mounting legs of minimum ten (10) gauge galvanized steel channels or I-beams. Base rails/mounting legs shall have enough height to ensure proper trapping of condensate of all air handling units. Contractor will be responsible for providing a housekeeping pad when base rails/mounting legs are not of sufficient height to properly trap unit. Base rail/mounting legs not constructed of galvanized steel shall be chemically cleaned, coated with rust inhibiting primer, and finished with rust inhibiting enamel.
2.3 CASING:
2.3.1 Construct casings of minimum sixteen (16) gauge galvanized steel structural frames and minimum two (2) inch thick double wall panels. Construct double wall panels of minimum eighteen (18) gauge galvanized steel exterior panels and minimum twenty (20) gauge perforated galvanized steel interior panels in the fan section and solid twenty (20) gauge galvanized steel in all other sections. In order to properly clean the interior of the air handler of microbial growth and other debris, the casings shall be constructed such that structural frames are free standing and double wall panels are non- load bearing.
2.3.2 Construct casing sections located upstream of supply fan for operation at four (4) inches water gage negative static pressure and casing sections located downstream of supply fan for operation at six (6) inches water gage positive static pressure. Seal joints between casing sections with closed-cell foam gasketing for leak seal and thermal and acoustical break. Maximum allowable leakage shall not exceed 1% at the unit design total operating pressure. Units found to exceed leakage limits or to have condensation upon operation shall be corrected by a factory certified technician at no cost to the owner. Unit casing shall be able to withstand up to 8 inches water gage positive or negative pressure with at maximum deflection of 1/200.
2.3.3 Panels shall be fully removable to allow for a proper way to thoroughly clean panels of microbial growth and to access internal parts. Secure panels to structural frames with zinc chromated plated screws. Seal joints between exterior panels and structural frames with closed-cell foam gasketing for leak seal and thermal and acoustical break.
2.3.4 Casings not constructed of G90-U galvanized steel, casings with welds on exterior surfaces, or casings with welds on interior surfaces that have burned through to exterior surfaces shall be chemically cleaned, coated with rust inhibiting primer, and finished with rust inhibiting enamel in order to prevent premature corrosion and microbial growth.
Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units with Coils 23 73 00 -2
2.3.5 Casing shall have removable access panels or doors as scheduled on drawings. Construct access doors of minimum eighteen (18) gauge galvanized steel exterior panels and minimum twenty-two (22) gauge galvanized steel interior panels. Provide automotive style neoprene gasketing around full perimeter of access doors to prevent air leakage. Provide "ventlock" style non-corrosive alloy latches operable from the inside or outside of unit. If access doors do not open against unit operating pressure, provide safety latches that allow access doors to partially open after first handle movement and fully open after second handle movement. Insulate access doors with two (2) inch thick 1-1/2 pound per cubic foot density matt faced fiber glass insulation. The above mentioned type access doors shall be provided in the following sections, at a minimum: Fan section, chilled water coil section, and heating water coil section, mixing box section.
2.3.6 Insulate ALL casing sections, including filter/mixing box section with closed cell foam insulation with minimum R- value of 13. Provide double wall casing construction and encase insulation between exterior and interior casing panels such that no insulation is exposed to airstream. Foil facing on insulation is not acceptable as alternate to double wall construction. Insulate all structural channels connected to casing panels and cover openings in structural channels with galvanized steel. Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A.
2.3.7 Provide sealed double wall drain pans constructed of minimum 18 gauge stainless steel exterior pans and minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel interior pans. Encase manufacturer's standard insulation between exterior and interior walls. Drain pans shall be sloped in two (2) planes; cross break interior pans and pitch toward drain connections to ensure complete condensate drainage. Units with coils shall have drain pans under complete coil section and horizontal draw-thru units shall have drain pans under complete fan section, coil sections and all access sections between coils. All drain pan connections will be to the side of the unit to enable proper trapping. The contractor shall properly pipe all drain connections per the local codes.
2.4 FANS:
2.4.1 Provide supply fan sections with forward curved (FC), double width, double inlet centrifugal fans or dual plug-type plenum fans designed and suitable for class of service indicated on the unit schedule. The fan type shall be scheduled on the prints. Fan shaft to be properly sized and protectively coated with lubricating oil. Fan shafts shall be solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. Fans shall be statically and dynamically tested as an assembly at the required RPM to meet design specifications. Key fan wheels to fan shaft to prevent slipping. Dual plug fans as indicated on the AHU Schedule shall be direct drive.
2.4.2 Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated pillow-block ball bearings selected for L-50, 200,000 hour average life per ANSI/AFBMA 9. Extend grease lubrication fittings to drive side of unit with plastic tubes and zerk fittings rigidly attached to casing.
2.4.3 Mount fans on minimum 16 gauge steel isolation bases. Internally mount motors on same isolation bases and internally isolate fans with one (1) inch or two (2) inch housed spring isolators. Install flexible canvas ducts between fan and casings to ensure proper isolation and prevent vibration and noise from being transmitted through the unit and ductwork. Flexible canvas ducts shall comply with NFPA 90A.
2.4.4 Fan sections shall have full height, double wall, hinged, removable access doors on drive side for inspection and maintenance of internal components. Construct doors as described above.
2.4.5 Statically and dynamically balance fan section assemblies. Fan section assemblies include fan wheels, shafts, bearings, drives, belts, isolation bases and isolators. Allow isolators to free float when performing fan balance. Measure vibration at each fan shaft bearing in horizontal, vertical and axial directions. Balance at design RPM's as scheduled on drawings.
2.5 MOTORS AND DRIVES:
2.5.1 Factory install all motors on slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension.
2.5.2 Fan Motors shall be heavy duty, high efficiency open drip-proof, operable at the scheduled voltage and phase. The minimum motor efficiency shall be 92%.
2.5.3 V-Belt Drive shall be variable pitch rated at 1.2 times the motor nameplate.
2.6 COILS:
2.6.1 Install coils such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casings. All coils shall be AHRI 410 certified.
Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units with Coils 23 73 00 -3
2.6.2 Construct coils of configuration plate fins and seamless tubes. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to tubes by means of mechanical expansion of tubes. Do not use soldering or tinning in bonding process.
2.6.3 Construct coil casings of minimum 16 gauge stainless steel with formed end supports and top and bottom channels. If two or more coils are stacked in unit, install intermediate drain channels between coils to drain condensate to main drain pans without flooding lower coils or passing condensate through airstream. Staggered or offset coils designed to fit additional coil area in smaller casings are not acceptable. All coils shall be vertically stacked on top of one another.
2.6.4 Water Coils
2.6.4.1 Clearly label supply and return headers on outside of units such that direction of coil water-flow is counter to direction of unit air-flow.
2.6.4.2 Coils shall be proof tested to 300 psig and leak tested to 200 psig air pressure under water.
2.6.4.3 Construct headers of round copper pipe or cast iron.
2.6.4.4 Construct tubes of 1/2 inch O.D. copper and construct fins of aluminum.
2.7 FILTERS:
2.7.1 Provide factory fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casings. All filter sections shall be furnished complete with insulated double wall construction. Filter sections shall have filter guides and full height, double wall, hinged, removable access doors for filter removal. Construct doors in accordance with these contract documents. Filter sections shall flange to other unit components. Provide filter blockoffs as required to prevent air bypass around filters. The manufacturer shall provide two (2) complete sets of filters, in addition to start-up filters. The contractor shall provide additional filters required to maintain cleanliness of the equipment. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning the units internally prior to completion of the project.
2.7.2 For the prefilter and the mixing box, provide two (2) inch angled filter sections with maximum face velocity of 500 feet per minute with disposable pleated media filters. Filters shall be removable from one side of filter sections.
2.8 DAMPERS AND FLOW MEASURING STATION FOR USE IN MIXING BOX:
2.8.1 Provide internally mounted return air dampers as scheduled on drawings. Return air dampers shall be equal to Ruskin CD60 double skin airfoil design or equivalent. Provide internally mounted outside air dampers with blade seals. Construct damper blades of minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel and damper frames of minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel. Provide parallel blade action configured to mix return and outside air. Provide dampers with metal compressible jamb seals and extruded vinyl blade edge seals. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings. Damper blade lengths shall not exceed 60 inches. Leakage rate shall not exceed 8 CFM/square foot at one inch water gage and 12 CFM/square foot at 4 inches water gage. Provide separate damper actuators for return and outside air.
2.8.2 Provide air flow measuring station for the outside air connections of each air handling unit. The air flow measuring station shall be installed in the air handling unit mixing box, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s published requirements. The air flow measuring systems shall operate with a 24 VAC power supply and be capable of functioning accurately between -20°F and +160°F. The air flow measuring system shall transmit a 2-10 VDC linear signal representative of velocity and be factory calibrated with total accuracy of +/- 5% of actual flow down to 15% of the nominal flow. Calibration of the airflow measurement system shall be the responsibility of the Building Automation System contractor. The Building Automation System contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing the damper actuators for the air flow measurement and modulation device.
2.8.3 Externally mounted outside airflow measuring stations are acceptable for indoor units. The HVAC contractor shall be responsible for providing the measuring station and all connections, equipment and access panels necessary to provide an installation equal to that specified for measuring stations mounted internal to the air handling unit.
2.9 ACCESS SECTIONS:
2.9.1 Provide access sections as shown or scheduled on drawings. Access sections shall have double wall, hinged, removable access doors on one side of section. Construct doors as outlined above.
2.9.2 Construct access sections such that access may be obtained to internal components through any access panel. Construct panels of minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. In order to properly clean the interior of the air handler of
Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units with Coils 23 73 00 -4
microbial growth and other debris, the casings shall be constructed such that structural frames are free standing and double wall panels are non-loading bearing. Contractor shall be responsible to provide connection flanges and all other framework that is needed on unit to ensure that removal of double wall panels shall not affect structural integrity of unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
3.1.1 The contractor shall properly orient and position the equipment on the existing structural support and install per the manufacturers recommendation.
3.1.2 The equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations and these contract documents.
3.1.3 Make connections to coils per the coil details outlined in these contract documents.
END OF SECTION
Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units with Coils 23 73 00 -5
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 04 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
The scope of the electrical phase of this project shall include all labor, materials, equipment, etc., required to fulfill the intent of the Contract Documents and shall include the work specified under the following sections:
DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL
SECTION 260500-COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SECTION 260503-EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS SECTION 260519-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 260526-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533-RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553-IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 262000-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION SECTION 262726-WIRING DEVICES
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
All applicable provisions of Division 00 and 01 govern work under this division. Refer to these articles in the specifications for additional information.
1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS:
A. All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the applicable state, national and local ordinances, building codes and the National Electric Code. B. Refer to each section for applicable codes and reference standards.
1.4 FEES, PERMITS AND TAXES:
A. This Contractor shall make arrangements for and pay for all inspection fees and permits required by the local authorities. The Contractor shall also pay all taxes levied for labor and materials associated with work under this Division.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. The symbol "" indicates a requirement for submittals.
B. Shop drawings, manufacturer's data materials lists, etc., are required for all equipment and material where submittals are required. C. Refer to "General Conditions" and/or "Instructions to Bidders" for additional information on submittals.
D. As a minimum, submittals shall be presented from published manufacturer's data and in such a form that the Architect can readily verify compliance with codes, standards, and the Contract Documents including construction features, rough-in requirements, etc. Each submittal shall contain data relevant to the particular equipment (including options). The data shall be identified by "hy-liteing", arrows, underlining, etc. Do not submit pages of non-relevant information. Broad general data is not acceptable. If equipment submitted is not as specified in the Contract Documents, then the submittal shall contain specific details prominently identifying any differences in form, fit or function. If the equipment submitted is not as specified, then the Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs necessary to install and connect the equipment. This includes, but is not limited to, increased panelboard size, circuit breaker size, disconnect size or circuit size. Submit dimensional layout of all electrical equipment locations, drawn to scale, with equipment locations shown. Clearances shall be in accordance with NEC and local codes. Panelboard and switchgear submittals will be rejected without dimensioned room or equipment location layouts.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 04 00 - 1
1.6 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS:
A. The symbol "
B. Each operating and maintenance manual shall apply specifically to the equipment installed. In those cases where one manual covers a general class of equipment, the contractor shall be required to identify (hy-liteing, underlining, etc.) those portions which apply to the installed equipment. All operating and maintenance manuals shall be available for inspection by the Architect/Engineer at the final review. Do no submit operating and maintenance manuals unless specifically requested.
C. Provide (2) two copies of operating and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall be bound in large ring loose-leaf binders and contain the following:
1. Manufacturer's instructions and/or installation manual. 2. Additional items that may be required in Division 00 and 01.
1.7 PRIOR APPROVAL:
Where the contractor wishes to substitute equipment or materials under an "or equal" clause, he shall submit to the Architect in writing seven (7) work days prior to bid opening lists of proposed substitutions which, from published manufacturer's data, cover the salient features of the proposed substitution. This requirement does not apply to light fixtures. Approvals will be issued in writing.
1.8 WARRANTY:
This Contractor shall guaranty fully all workmanship, material, equipment, systems, etc., provided by him for a period of one year after substantial completion of the project. The use of building equipment for temporary service and testing does not constitute the beginning of the warranty. This guaranty means that this Contractor shall make good to the owner, at no cost, any defects that become apparent during the year following substantial completion. This guaranty is in addition to any other guaranties or warranties and is not intended to limit such other guaranties or warranties.
1.9 DEFINITIONS: The following words and phrases are hereby defined:
A. "provide": Furnish and install all material and labor required for a complete installation ready for operation in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents.
B. "as required": Indicates that the contractor shall perform the work or provide the material as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and in accordance with applicable codes or regulations.
C. "or equal": Indicates that the contractor may substitute equipment by another manufacturer if the salient features of the equipment indicated by manufacturer's name and/or described are, in the judgment of the Architect, adequate. See article PRIOR APPROVAL.
D. "contractor": Where the word(s) "contractor" or "this contractor" is used herein it refers to the contractor engaged to execute the work under this division of the specifications only, even though he may be technically described as a sub-contractor.
E. "intent of the Contract Documents": The specific intent of these documents is to provide to the owner, in a thoroughly functional condition, all the various systems, equipment. etc., indicated herein. Final interpretation of the "intent" shall rest with the Architect.
F. "shall": Indicates a mandatory requirements.
1.10 INSPECTION OF THE SITE:
A. The drawings are prepared from the best information available and reflect all conditions commensurate with this information. However, the contractor should visit the site prior to submitting a proposal and should verify the locations, sizes, depths, pressures, etc., of all existing utilities and familiarize himself with working conditions, hazards, existing grades, soil conditions, obstructions, etc. If it becomes evident that existing site conditions will impair the proper operation of the utilities, the Architect shall be notified in writing.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 04 00 - 2
B. All proposals shall take these existing conditions and any revisions required into consideration, and the lack of specific site information on the drawings shall not relieve the contractor of any responsibility.
1.11 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY:
This Contractor assumes all responsibility for the safety of his personnel on the project during construction. The Contract Documents do not include materials, procedures, components, etc., required to insure construction safety. Refer to General Conditions for additional information.
1.12 DAMAGE:
A. This Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the project caused by this Contractor's failure to recognize hazards associated with items such as lack of power, scheduling of work (tardiness), inexperienced workmen, excessive cutting, etc. This Contractor shall repair at no expense to the owner any such damage.
B. This Contractor shall familiarize himself with working conditions to the extent that he shall be responsible for damage to concealed piping, wiring and other equipment meant to remain, and shall repair any damage caused by his negligence at no cost to the owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP:
A. All work shall be done by experienced craftsmen skilled in the applicable trade.
B. Unprofessional and incomplete work shall be rejected and corrected at no additional expense. The judgement of professionalism and completeness of work shall be made by the architect/engineer and shall be final.
3.2 MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:
All equipment shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.3 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT:
The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of stored materials and installed equipment. Fixtures and equipment, whether located inside or outside, shall be tightly covered with sheet polyethylene or waterproof tarpaulin as protection against dirt, rust, moisture and abuse from other trades. Adequate air circulation shall be provided under any protective sheet to prevent condensate build up. Materials and equipment shall not be stored where it can come into direct contact with the ground. Conduit, conduit hangars, cable tray and equipment shall not be used by other trades as supports for their equipment, scaffolds or personnel. At the completion of the work, equipment, fixtures, exposed supports and piping shall be cleaned of loose dirt, construction debris, overspray, etc., to the satisfaction of the Architect. Repairs made necessary by damage shall be paid for by the Contractor.
3.4 CONFLICTS, INTERFERENCES AND COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES:
A. The drawings are not to be construed as shop drawings but indicate the extent, general locations, arrangement, etc., of conduit systems and equipment. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic and shall not be scaled for exact size. If the contractor has any questions regarding the layout of a particular device or equipment item he shall contact the architect for clarification. This Contractor shall, in laying out his work, refer to other sections of the specifications and other drawings such as air conditioning, structural, plumbing, architectural, etc., in order to eliminate conflicts and undue delays in the progress of the work. See article CUTTING AND PATCHING for additional coordination required. Where items are furnished by other trades require connections by this Contractor, they shall be held responsible for providing rough-in drawings and assistance upon request.
B. In the event of interferences, piping or equipment requiring set grades or elevations shall have precedence over conduit, lighting, outlet boxes, air conditioning, ductwork, etc.
C. Plans, specifications and other documents have been prepared and developed with reasonable professional care and coordination. It is the intent that all documents are supportive and complimentary, one to the other;
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 04 00 - 3
and as such what is required by one shall be considered as required and binding as if indicated by all. Work indicated shall include, regardless of whether or not specifically stated, such supportive or required items or work as consistent with what is indicated, is reasonably inferable from what is indicated, and/or is common construction procedure or knowledge with regard to what is indicated.
D. In the event of conflict between codes as interpreted by the authority having jurisdiction, and the contract documents, the codes shall govern.
E. In the event of a conflict between manufacturer's installation instructions and the drawings, the manufacturer's installation instructions shall govern.
F. Should discrepancies be found between the documents and/or an interpretation is required, and a decision or interpretation to the contractor is not rendered by the Architect, it shall be assumed the contractor has reviewed all the documents to find the most costly method or items in question which then shall be required. One document does not take precedence over another when interpreting a discrepancy.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. All cutting required by the installation of sleeves, conduit, equipment, etc., shall be coordinated with the General Contractor, but performed by this Contractor. Patching shall be by General Contractor. This Contractor shall not cut any structural element or any finished work without written permission from the Architect.
B. This Contractor shall cut and patch all paving as required by the installation of buried conduit or wire.
3.6 PAINTING:
A. All painting except "touch-up" shall be provided under the painting section (Division 9) unless noted otherwise. All exposed conduit, equipment, etc., shall be left clean and free from rust or grease and ready for the painter.
B. Where equipment finishes are damaged, this Contractor shall obtain touch-up paint in matching colors from the equipment manufacturer and paint as required.
3.7 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. This Contractor shall bring all required electrical service to all equipment items furnished under other sections of these specifications or by the owner, make final connections, and leave equipment ready for operation. This Contractor shall coordinate with any affected trade to assure correct operation of the equipment item, i.e., phase rotation, switching, control location and accessibility.
B. When the contractor is uncertain about the method of installation, proper location, etc., he shall ask for further instructions or details. Failure to request such information will not excuse non-compliance.
C. All roof mounted mechanical equipment shall be served through curb. If not possible, then contractor shall notify the architect in writing providing a no cost alternative.
3.8 CONTROL AND INTERLOCK WIRING:
A. Except as otherwise indicated on the drawings, details of control wiring for work under the Mechanical Section are not shown. Control systems, components and control and interlock wiring for mechanical equipment will be furnished under Division 23. Control devices including, but not limited to, thermostats, fan speed and level control switches, relays and electro-pneumatic switches shall be furnished under Division 23. Motor control centers, magnetic starters and normal motor starters shall be provided under Division 26 unless noted to be provided with mechanical equipment in Division 23.
B. Power wiring to starters, relays and contactors shall be under Division 26. Power wiring to magnetic starters shall consist of wiring to the line side terminals of the magnetic starter or contactor and wiring away from the load side terminals to the equipment, except where such wiring is installed pre-wired by the equipment vendor such as for rooftop air conditioning units.
1. Power wiring to 120 volt-1 phase-60Hz and 277 volt-1 phase-60Hz fans, unit heaters, fan-coil units and pumps shall include all portions of the branch circuit, except wiring inside an automatic temperature control panel (ATC) or Direct Digital Control Panel (DDC) or magnetic starter. Such internal wiring shall be furnished under Division 23.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 04 00 - 4
Under Division 26:
1. Furnish all duct mounted smoke detectors for air handling unit, smoke dampers, etc. 2. Provide wiring among detectors, fire alarm system, magnetic starters and relays, ATC panels and DDC panels. 3. Install line voltage components. 4. Circuiting to line voltage safety devices, i.e. vibration sensors on cooling towers.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install all starters, pilot switches, control devices and miscellaneous items of electrical equipment furnished under other sections of these specifications that are not integrally mounted with their associated equipment.
D. The definition of control wiring for this specification is wiring that does not supply utilization energy and is generally below 120 volts. This wiring (control wiring) is to be provided under Division 23. Power wiring is typically branch or feeder circuiting that terminates in an electrical outlet that supplies utilization energy for machines or other electrical equipment. This voltage is generally 120 volts or greater and is provided under Division 26. No subsequent allowance will be made because of error or failure to obtain necessary information to completely estimate and perform work associated with the control system.
3.9 FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING:
All building penetrations to the outside shall be flashed and counter-flashed as required to eliminate leaks.
3.10 TESTS:
All circuit and operational tests of the electrical systems shall be made by this Contractor and repeated until approved by the Architect. Conduit systems shall not be covered or otherwise concealed until review has been made and approvals obtained from the Architect. Notify the Architect four days prior to tests to allow for scheduling.
3.11 CLEAN-UP:
Where all work has been finally tested, this Contractor shall clean all work installed by him, including all fixtures, equipment, and all exposed work.
3.12 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE:
A. Where demolition of equipment or materials is required, this Contractor shall minimize cutting and exercise all due caution to leave undamaged surfaces, material and equipment meant to remain.
B. All existing items that are to be removed shall remain property of the owner unless declared as salvage. Salvage materials shall become property of the contractor and be removed from the site. Items declared as the owner's property shall be neatly stored on the site as directed by the owner.
C. Please note that demolition of the HVAC system will require electrical work and coordination. Refer to the Architectural specifications for additional information regarding the phasing of the construction.
D. Existing electrical equipment (except cast-in-place conduit) such as panelboards, wiring devices, lighting fixtures, junction boxes, etc., are to be removed from the job. Where a circuit is interrupted by removal of a device or fixture from that circuit, install wire and conduit as required to restore service to the remaining devices and fixtures on that circuit.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 04 00 - 5
SECTION 26 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding electrodes and conductors; bonding methods and materials; conduit and equipment supports, anchors and fasteners; and nameplates and wire markers.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Grounding systems use metal underground pipe, metal frame of building and driven ground rod as grounding electrodes. Grounding system connections use mechanical fasteners and exothermic welds.
B. Select materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners, and supports to carry loads of equipment and raceway, including weight of wire and cable in raceway. Anchor and fasten electrical products to building elements and finishes as follows:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Expansion anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Beam clamps, spring steel clips, and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Toggle bolts. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Wood screws.
C. Identify Electrical components as follows: 1. Nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Wire marker for each conductor at panelboards, pull boxes, and outlet and junction boxes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog data for grounding electrodes and connections; for fastening components; and nameplates, labels, and markers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Product Description:Engraved three-layer laminated plastic nameplate, black letters on white background. Attach with stainless steel fasteners.
B. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
2.2 WIRE MARKERS
A. Product Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers with circuit or control wire number permanently stamped or printed.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.
C. Do not perform work on energized equipment or circuits.
D. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated and/or as required by the latest applicable edition of the National Electrical Code®.
B. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members.
C. Install sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
D. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to equipment front using stainless steel fasteners.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 2
SECTION 26 05 03
EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Submittal procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
C. Determine connection locations and requirements.
D. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.
E. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CORD AND PLUGS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 26 05 03 - 1
C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for equipment.
D. Cord Construction: Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
E. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned equipment wiring connections, including abandoned connections above accessible ceiling finishes.
B. Disconnect abandoned utilization equipment and remove wiring connections. Remove abandoned components when connected raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes and enclosures not removed.
C. Extend existing equipment connections using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Make electrical connections.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.
D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
E. Provide cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug.
F. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.
G. Provide disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.
H. Provide terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
I. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide
EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 26 05 03 - 2
personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components, proper phase rotation and configurations.
END OF SECTION
EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 26 05 03 - 3
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND LESS)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes building wire and cable; nonmetallic-sheathed cable; direct burial cable; service entrance cable; armored cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and connections.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for wire identification. 2. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching required by this section. 3. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows: 1. Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for control circuits. 5. 10 AWG conductors minimum for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet (25 m). 6. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet (160 m).
B. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW, THHN, THWN or XHHW insulation. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW, THHN, THWN or XHHW insulation. 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, THW, THHN, THWN or XHHW insulation. 4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type TW, THW, THWN insulation. 5. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THWN insulation. 6. Underground Locations: Use only building wire, Type THWN insulation.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conductor sizes are based on copper conductors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit building wire and each cable assembly type.
C. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors substituted for copper conductors. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1
D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings and report discrepancies in writing to the Architect/Engineer.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required.
C. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned or otherwise noted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Anaconda. 2. Southwire. 3. General Electric. 4. Anderson. 5. Thomas & Betts. 6. ITT. 7. Blackburn. 8. Penn-Union. 9. Cerrowire. 10. Rome Cable. 11. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C. Conductor: Copper.
D. Insulation: NFPA 70; Type THW, THHN, THWN, XHHW insulation for feeders and branch circuits.
2.2 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. All splices, taps, connections, terminations, etc., shall be made with appropriate connectors in a workmanlike manner and in compliance with the N.E.C.
B. Splices for any combination of stranded and/or solid copper wire up to 3#8 or 2#6 shall be made with solderless electrical spring connectors. Splices for larger wire shall be solderless compression indention type properly taped.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2
C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 3M Scotchlok, Panduit P-Conn, or Ideal Wirenut
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.
C. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
D. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned wire and cable, including abandoned wire and cable above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces where removed cables pass through building finishes.
B. Disconnect abandoned circuits and remove circuit wire and cable. Remove abandoned boxes when wire and cable servicing boxes is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes not removed.
C. Provide access to existing wiring connections remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or install access panel.
D. Extend existing circuits using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
E. Clean and repair existing wire and cable remaining or wire and cable to be reinstalled.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions.
B. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
C. Identify [and color code] wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
D. Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway: 1. Pull conductors into raceway at same time. 2. Provide building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment. 3. Do not group more homeruns in a single raceway than shown on the drawings. Do not group more than three (3) homeruns in a single raceway without the written permission of the Architect. Provide a separate neutral for each phase leg in the raceway unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 4. All conduit penetrations through fire rated ceilings, walls or floors shall be fire stopped using U.L. approved materials and methods to maintain the fire rating of the ceiling, wall or floor structure. All penetrations shall comply with the latest applicable edition of the UL fire resistance directory Vol. I and Vol. II. 5. Grade all raceways away from the service entrance equipment to prevent water damage. Cap ends of raceways to prevent entrance of water and other foreign material during construction.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3
6. Pull boxes shall be provided as required for long runs greater than 200 feet and where excessive turns are encountered. Provide nylon pull cord in all empty conduits. 7. Provide suitable split-wedge cable supporting devices in each conduit riser, as required to properly support vertical cables.
E. Special Techniques - Cable: 1. Protect exposed cable from damage. 2. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels or ceiling grid system. 3. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
F. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections: 1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. 4. Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. 5. Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
G. Aluminum: 1. Terminate aluminum conductors with tin-plated, aluminum-bodied compression connectors only. Fill with anti-oxidant compound before installing conductor. 2. Install suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting aluminum conductors to copper conductors.
H. Install solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
I. Install stranded conductors for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. However, when stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, then install crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under screws.
3.5 WIRE COLOR
A. General 1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller, install wire colors in accordance with the following: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. c. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase. 2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and boxes. Colors are as follows: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. c. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase.
B. Neutral Conductors: White. When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number.
C. Branch Circuit Conductors: Install home runs with each phase uniquely color coded.
D. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase.
E. Ground Conductors: 1. For 6 AWG and smaller: Green. 2. For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction boxes.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
END OF SECTION
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 5
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Rod electrodes. 2. Active electrodes. 3. Wire. 4. Grounding well components. 5. Mechanical connectors. 6. Exothermic connections.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Bonding or welding bars when reinforcing steel is used for electrodes.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes: 1. Metal underground water pipe. 2. Metal building frame. 3. Concrete-encased electrode. 4. Rod electrode.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum. In strict accordance with NFPA 99.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.
C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled.
B. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 99.
C. Maintain one copy of documents on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
D. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Foundation Electrodes: 4 AWG.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor bare.
D. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor insulated.
2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 2. Copperweld, Inc. 3. Erico, Inc. 4. ILSCO Corporation. 5. O-Z Gedney Co. 6. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 2
7. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation.
2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 2. Cadweld, Erico, Inc. 3. Copperweld, Inc. 4. ILSCO Corporation. 5. O-Z Gedney Co. 6. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 7. Substitutions: [Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, and all surface contaminants at connection points.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide in accordance with IEEE 142 and 1100.
B. Provide rod electrodes to achieve specified resistance to ground.]
C. Provide grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.
D. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Electrically bond steel together.
E. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
F. Provide isolated grounding conductor for circuits supplying electronic cash registers, personal computers and sensitive electronic equipment in accordance with IEEE 1100.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
C. Perform, record and submit in writing, leakage current tests in accordance with NFPA 99.
D. Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 3
E. When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check receptacles in entire project and correct. Perform retest.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 4
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Sleeves. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. 6. Firestopping relating to electrical work. 7. Firestopping accessories. 8. Equipment bases and supports.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Product requirements for concrete for placement by this section. 2. Section 27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
B. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory, Volume I and II.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. All conduit and other penetrations through fire rated ceilings, walls or floors shall be fire stopped using U.L. approved materials and methods to maintain the fire rating of the ceiling, wall or floor structure. All penetrations shall comply with the latest applicable edition of the UL fire resistance directory Vol. I and Vol. II.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1
B. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263 and UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating.
C. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Firestopping: Conform to FM and UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
C. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.
E. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and supports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
H. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies shall comply with the latest applicable edition of the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory, Volumes I and II.
B. Maintain copy of U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume I and II on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by the materials manufacturer.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 2
C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F (15 degrees C).
C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Raceways shall be installed neatly racked, routed parallel or perpendicular to building lines, securely attached and supported complete with associated couplings, connectors and fittings. Installation shall conform with applicable sections of N.E.C. Article 345 through 355.
B. Concealed raceway shall be supported with galvanized stamped steel "2-Hole" clamps secured to structure. Conduit or ductwork shall not be used to support other conduit. Exposed raceways shall be secured to structure with galvanized stamped steel "2-Hole" clamps or suspended from structure with beam clamps and conduit hangers. All conduits shall be directly supported by the building structure with the use of the appropriate factory fabricated support system as specified above. Use of caddy clips to support conduit to top of T-bar ceiling grid or ceiling support system will not be permitted.
Grouped raceways shall be supported with galvanized steel channel assemblies.
Kindorf Globe Strut Unistrut strut B-909 G-5812-PO P1000-HS one-hole strap C-105 G-7000 P1100
Acceptable manufacturers: Unistrut, Power Strut, Globe Strut, or Kindorf.
Raceway supports shall be spaced as follows: a. rigid metal, IMC or EMT - within 3' of termination, coupling or connection and 10' o.c. b. rigid nonmetallic - per N.E.C. paragraph 347-8. c. flexible nonmetallic - within 12" of termination or connection, 4.5' o.c.
C. Raceways shall be concealed where possible in finished areas, and may be exposed in mechanical/electrical equipment rooms.
D. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads.
E. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.
F. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten.
G. Conduit clamps - general purpose: Two hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.
H. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F (85 degrees C). Self locking.
2.2 SLEEVES
A. Furnish materials in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 3
B. Sleeves for Conduit Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Conduit Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage (1.2mm) thick galvanized steel.
D. Sleeves for Conduit Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
E. Fire-stopping Insulation: Per the latest edition of the UL Fire Resistance Directory Volumes I and II.
2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. 2. NMP Corporation.
B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
2.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products. 6. Specified Technology, Inc.
B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application.
2.5 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Firestopping accessories shall comply with the latest applicable edition of the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory, Volumes I and II.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C. Provide materials to arrest liquid material leakage. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 4
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill or cut structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, expansion anchors, and preset inserts as required and as approved by the project structural engineer. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners as required and as approved by the project structural engineer. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors as required and as approved by the project structural engineer. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners as required and as approved by the project structural engineer. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts as required and as approved by the project structural engineer.. 6. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws as required and as approved by the project structural engineer. 7. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws as required and as approved by the project structural engineer.
B. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above, recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with the latest applicable edition of the NEC.
D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, conduit or ceiling suspension wires.
E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.
F. Supports: 1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install stainless steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall. 4. Support vertical conduit at every floor.
3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING
A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping to comply with the latest applicable edition of the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory, Volumes I and II.
3.5 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES
A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.
B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 5
C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
E. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch (25mm) above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
F. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
G. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 6
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 39 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures. 7. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 8. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 5. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway, J- boxes and pullboxes required to complete wiring system.
B. Underground More than 5 feet (1500mm) outside Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal boxes or nonmetallic handhole.
C. Underground Within 5 feet (1500mm) from Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic boxes.
D. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast or nonmetallic metal boxes.
E. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal pull, and junction boxes.
F. In Slab Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal boxes.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1
G. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide plastic coated rigid. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
H. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
I. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch (19mm) unless otherwise specified.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit for the following: 1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Nonmetallic conduit. 4. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. 5. Nonmetallic tubing. 6. Raceway fittings. 7. Conduit bodies. 8. Surface raceway. 9. Wireway. 10. Pull and junction boxes. 11. Handholes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents:
1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 3/4 inch. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2
C. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.2 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating 40 mil (0.1mm) thick.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit.
2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, compression type (no set screw allowed).
2.6 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.7 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway.
C. Finish: As directed by Architect.
D. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on raceway.
2.8 WIREWAY
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Oiltight, dust-tight and raintight type wireway. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4
C. Knockouts: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Size and length as indicated on Drawings.
E. Cover: Hinged and Screw cover with full gaskets.
F. Connector: Flanged.
G. Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws drip shield.
H. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish.
2.9 OUTLET BOXES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Provide metallic galvanized boxes per the latest applicable edition of N.E.C. Article 370 at each outlet location indicated on the drawings or as required.
C. Boxes at exterior locations shall be cast aluminum with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.
D. The owner reserves the right to make minor adjustments to the locations of outlet boxes prior to rough-in.
E. Sizes and configuration of boxes shall be as required for the intended service and shall conform to and be applied in accordance with Table 370-16(a) of the N.E.C. Provide extension rings, expandable bars sets, supports, gaskets for weatherproof type etc., where required.
Boxes shall be equal to Steel City with "CV" bracket. Acceptable Manufacturers: Steel City, Hubbell, or Appleton.
F. Floor mounted boxes shall be adjustable and gasketed. See Wiring Devices for additional information.
G. Gang type boxes shall be used where multiple wiring devices are located adjacent to one another, including cast in floor boxes.
H. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
I. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
J. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer and provide threaded hubs.
K. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.
L. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 5
2.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
C. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16.
D. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type [4X; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
E. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: [Smooth] [Nonskid] cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC".
F. Fiberglass Handholes: Die-molded, glass-fiber hand holes: 1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 inch x 6 inch (150 mm x 150 mm) cable entrance at center bottom of each side. 2. Cover: Glass-fiber, weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
D. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
E. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
F. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work in accordance with the latest applicable edition of the NEC. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6
B. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
C. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
D. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
E. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat and workman like appearance.
3.4 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY
A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system.
B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.
E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29.
H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls and building lines.
I. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
K. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch (19mm). Do not cross conduits in slab. Verify with project Structural Engineer prior to placing.
L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.
M. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
Q. Provide conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
R. Provide no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Provide conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Provide factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size.
S. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 7
T. Provide fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic, control and expansion joints.
U. Provide suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
V. Provide suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
W. Surface Raceway: Provide flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level. Provide insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
X. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.
Y. Flexible metal conduit may be used for final connections to recessed lighting fixtures and shall be used for final connections to motors, transformers and other equipment subject to vibration. Maximum length permitted is 72 inches. Use "liquid-tight" type conduit for outdoor installations, where exposed to continuous or intermittent moisture and to all liquid pump motors.
3.5 INSTALLATION - BOXES
A. Provide wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings or as specified in section for outlet device.
B. The owner reserves the right to adjust box location up to 20 feet (6m) prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.
C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.
D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in walls.
H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
I. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
M. Support boxes independently of conduit.
N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 8
3.6 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings and Architect’s reflected ceiling plan.
D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 9
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Stencils. 6. Underground Warning Tape. 7. Lockout Devices.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 2. Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems. 3. Section 28 05 53 - Identification for Electronic Safety and Security.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function. 3. Submit two (2) samples of each type of identification products applicable to project. 4. Submit two (2) nameplates, 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating materials and engraving quality.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in a workman like and neat manner.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three (3) years experience.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.
C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Install nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters on contrasting background color. White letters on red background for all items connected to an essential electrical system.
B. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inch (3mm) high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4 inch (6mm) high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads and panelboards.
C. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch.
2.2 LABELS
A. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. White letters on red background for essential electrical systems.
2.3 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.
B. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings.
2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS
A. Description: Nameplate fastened with straps.
B. Color: 1. Provide white letters on red background for essential electrical systems. 2. 480 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. 3. 208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 2
C. Legend: 1. 480 Volt System: 480 VOLTS. HIGH VOLTAGE. 2. 208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.
2.5 STENCILS
A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Raceway: 1/2 inch high letters. 2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Raceway: 1 inch high letters.
B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to the following: 1. Black lettering on white background. 2. White lettering on gray background. 3. Red lettering on white background. 4. Blue lettering on white background.
2.6 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red and yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
2.7 LOCKOUT DEVICES
A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Reinforced nylon hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Install identification on existing equipment to remain in accordance with this section.
B. Install identification on unmarked existing equipment.
C. Replace lost nameplates, labels or markers.
D. Re-stencil existing equipment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using stainless steel fasteners. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations. 6. Install nameplates for the following: a. Switchboards.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 3
b. Panelboards. c. Transformers. d. Service Disconnects. e. Motor Toggle Switches
C. Label Installation: 1. Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
D. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboards, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation [as indicated on Drawings].
E. Raceway Marker Installation: 1. Install raceway marker for each raceway longer than 6 feet. 2. Raceway Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center. 3. Raceway Painting: Identify conduit using field painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00. a. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet. b. Paint bands 20 feet (6000mm) on center. c. Color: 1) 480 Volt System: Blue. 2) 208 Volt System: Yellow.
F. Stencil Installation: 1. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.
G. Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.
H. Install Work in accordance with the latest applicable edition of the NEC.
END OF SECTION
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 4
SECTION 26 20 00
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes enclosed switches and circuit breakers; enclosed controllers and contactors; panelboards; and fuses.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing products with specified features.
1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Upon completion of the building, the Electrical Subcontractor shall provide the owner with spare fuses as shown below. 1. 10% of each type of rating installed 110 to 600 amperes. 2. One standard carton of each type and rating installed 0 to 100 amperes. 3. Three fuses each rating installed 601 to 6000 amperes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ENCLOSED FUSIBLE SWITCH
A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D, Model AD. 2. General Electric, Model TH. 3. Cutler-Hammer, Model DH.
B. Provide safety switches at each location indicated on the drawings or required by code. Switches shall be rigidly supported and properly aligned.
C. Switching mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break mechanism with handle as integral part of the box. All current carrying parts shall be electroplated.
D. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for interior locations and NEMA 3R for exterior locations, and shall be of code gauge steel (galvanized for NEMA 3R) with baked enamel finish and shall have locking hasp.
E. Ratings, fusing provisions, poles, etc., shall be as indicated.
F. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R or J fuses.
2.2 ENCLOSED NONFUSIBLE SWITCH
A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D, Model AD. 2. General Electric, Model TH. 3. Cutler-Hammer, Model DH.
B. Provide safety switches at each location indicated on the drawings or required by code. Switches shall be rigidly supported and properly aligned.
Low-Voltage Electrical Transmission 26 20 00 - 1
C. Switching mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break mechanism with handle as integral part of the box. All current carrying parts shall be electroplated.
D. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for interior locations and NEMA 3R for exterior locations, and shall be of code gauge steel (galvanized for NEMA 3R) with baked enamel finish and shall have locking hasp.
E. Ratings, fusing provisions, poles, etc., shall be as indicated.
F. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R or J fuses.
2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 3. Cutler-Hammer.
B. Product Description: Enclosed, molded-case circuit breaker conforming to NEMA AB 1.
C. Enclosure: NEMA AB 1, Type to meet conditions.
2.4 AUTOMATIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 3. Cutler-Hammer.
B. Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A controller for induction motors rated in horsepower.
C. Control Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
D. Product Options and Features: 1. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, standard duty type. 2. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 5, Form Z, rated A150.
E. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with disconnect in common enclosure, using fusible switch conforming to NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class [R] [J] fuses. Obtain IEC Class 2 coordinated component protection.
F. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type to meet conditions of installation.
2.5 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 3. Cutler-Hammer.
B. Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor.
C. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
D. Poles: To match circuit configuration and control function.
Low-Voltage Electrical Transmission 26 20 00 - 2
E. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, standard-duty type with Form Z contacts, rated A150.
F. Combination Contactors: Combine contactors with thermal magnetic circuit breaker conforming to NEMA AB 1, with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.
G. Combination Contactors: Combine contactors with enclosed knife switch conforming to NEMA KS 1, with externally operable handle and fuse clips designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class [R] [J] fuses.
H. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type to meet conditions.
2.6 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM:
A. Provide completely wired, UL listed, zone selective, ground fault protection system consisting of sense coils, ground fault relays and monitor test system. The system shall be capable of 2 level operation.
B. Equipment is based on Square D type GC system. Equal equipment by General Electric or Westinghouse is acceptable.
C. Sense Coil shall be laminated iron case with dual winding. Provide test winding for simulation of ground fault condition.
D. Ground Fault Relay shall continuously monitor the output of the sensor and shall initiate the opening of the circuit underground fault conditions. Current pickup shall be field adjustable from 100 to 1200 amperes. Time delay shall be field adjustable for 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 or 0.5 seconds.
E. Monitor-test System feature shall simulate a ground fault and shall reset each relay. Ground fault simulation and reset shall be actuated by illuminated pushbutton.
2.7 FUSES
A. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer, shall have characteristics to insure retention of positive selective coordination as designed, shall be of the same size shown on schedules, and, where not indicated on the drawings, shall be of the required size for proper operation of the equipment protected.
B. Fused rated 600 amperes or less for all general power circuits shall be voltage as required by the system, dual element, UL Class R time-delay type. The design shall provide time-delay of not less than ten seconds at 500% of ampere rating. The interrupting rating shall be 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. Peak let-thru values shall be as established by Underwriters' Laboratories Standard for Class RK1 fuses.
Bussmann Gould Shawmut Little Fuse
250V LPN-RK A2D (Amp)R LLNRK 600V LPS-RK A6D (Amp)R LLSRK
Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussmann, Gould Shawmut, or Little Fuse.
C. Fuses installed in individual motor circuits shall be sized at 125% of motor nameplate current or nameplate current rating for the next standard fuse size, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or indicated in the manufacturer's instructions for the equipment in which the motor is used.
D. Fuses, 601 amperes to 6000 amperes. The design shall provide time-delay of not less than four seconds at 500% of ampere rating and 45 seconds at 300% of ampere rating. The interrupting rating shall be 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. Peak let-thru currents (Ip) and energy let-thru values (I2T) shall not exceed the values established by Underwriters' Laboratories Standard for Class L fuses.
Low-Voltage Electrical Transmission 26 20 00 - 3
Bussmann Gould Shawmu Little Fuse
600VAC KRP-C A4BY KLPC
Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussmann, Gould Shawmut, or Little Fuse.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect abandoned distribution equipment. [Remove] [Install blank cover for] abandoned enclosures and boxes.
B. Maintain access to existing distribution equipment remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
C. Clean and repair existing distribution equipment to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics.
3.3 GROUNDING:
A. Electrical grounding shall conform to Article 250 of the N.E.C. Neutral conductors, cable shields and sheaths, metallic conduits, junction boxes enclosures and all conductive non-current carrying parts of equipment shall be grounded.
B. Ground rods shall be copper clad steel minimum 5/8" diameter by 8 feet long driven into the ground at least 8 feet, 6 inches.
3.4 TERMINATION LUGS:
Contractor shall coordinate size of termination lugs in all equipment with conductor sizes indicated on plan. Contractor shall notify equipment vendor of special lug requirements.
END OF SECTION
Low-Voltage Electrical Transmission 26 20 00 - 4